JP2021087893A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing a performance with high amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine 1 can execute a first performance and a second performance that can be executed after the first performance on the basis of the result of the determination. During the execution of the first performance and the execution of the second performance, a predetermined performance song that is not reproduced when the first performance and the second performance are not executed is reproduced. For the reproduction of the performance song, the performance song of a first tune is reproduced during the execution of the first performance, and the performance song of a second tune different from the first tune is reproduced during the execution of the second performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 15

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with an effect control means for controlling the effect.

For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player. Stop is displayed. Then, when the symbol indicating that it is determined to execute the special game is stopped and displayed, the special game in which the player can acquire the game medium is executed. In this type of gaming machine, there is one that outputs a production sound to produce a sound effect in synchronization with or asynchronously with the display effect performed on the display screen (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2020-80893

By the way, it cannot be said that the production performed by the conventional gaming machine has sufficient interest, and there is room for improvement in terms of improving the interest.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a highly entertaining effect.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is
Judgment means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player,
When the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed, the special game execution means for executing the special game and the special game execution means for executing the special game.
Equipped with a production control means to control the production,
The effect control means
Based on the result of the determination, the first effect and the second effect that can be performed after the first effect can be executed.
During the execution of the first effect and the execution of the second effect, a predetermined effect song that is not output when these effects are not executed is played.
The effect control means
The production is such that the production song of the first musical tone is played during the execution of the first production, and the production song of the second musical tone different from the first musical tone is played during the execution of the second production. It is characterized by controlling the reproduction of a song.

According to this gaming machine, during the execution of the first effect and the execution of the second effect, a predetermined effect song that is not output when these effects are not executed is played, and the first effect is being executed and the first effect is being executed. 2 Directed songs with different tunes are played when the directing is in progress. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the first effect or the second effect is being executed based on the effect song being reproduced, and the player can easily recognize that the effect song is being reproduced. Based on the tone of the song, it is possible to easily determine which of the first and second effects is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the problem that the player does not notice the transition from the first effect to the second effect, and the execution of the first effect and the second effect and the execution of the second effect. It is possible to obtain a high production effect by the synergistic effect with the reproduction of the production song.

According to the present invention, it is possible to carry out a highly interesting production.

Front view of gaming machine 1 Front view of game board 2 Enlarged view of the main display 40 in FIG. Explanatory drawing for explaining opening / closing control of 2nd prize opening 28 and V winning opening 287 A block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1. Explanatory diagram for explaining jackpot random numbers and symbol random numbers Explanatory drawing for explaining flow of game in game machine 1 Explanatory drawing exemplifying the flow of various productions such as reach production Explanatory drawing for explaining the variation pattern selection table used for the process of selecting the variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal game state. Screen diagram exemplifying the production in the normal gaming state (Part 1) Screen diagram exemplifying the production in the normal gaming state (Part 2) Screen view showing an example of production when V prize is notified during a jackpot game Screen diagram exemplifying the reach establishment fanning effect and the reach establishment success effect Screen diagram exemplifying the reach establishment fanning effect and the reach establishment failure effect A time chart that illustrates the flow of the production when the reach is established and the production is executed. A screen view showing a specific example of a notice during SP reach that is performed when a loss notification effect is executed in SP reach. Explanatory drawing for explaining the 1st suggestion image displayed during SP reach Screen diagram showing specific examples of SP reach notice and SPSP reach notice performed when developing from SP reach to SPSP reach (Part 1) Screen diagram showing specific examples of SP reach notice and SPSP reach notice performed when developing from SP reach to SPSP reach (Part 2) Screen diagram exemplifying a music selection screen Explanatory drawing for explaining selected music in probabilistic game state and time saving game state Explanatory diagram for explaining control about music reproduction Screen diagram exemplifying the effect performed before the start of the fluctuation of the look-ahead / button effect Screen diagram exemplifying the reach establishment failure effect performed during the change of the look-ahead / button effect Screen diagram exemplifying the reach establishment success effect performed during the change of the look-ahead / button effect Explanatory drawing illustrating the flow of pre-reading continuous button production Explanatory drawing for explaining the storage area of a main RAM 83 and the information stored in each storage area. Flow chart illustrating interrupt processing executed on the main control board 80 Detailed flowchart of the sensor detection process in step S2 of FIG. 28. Detailed flowchart of the pre-determination process in steps S211, 219 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 28 Detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 31 Detailed flowchart of the fluctuation pattern selection process in step S309 of FIG. 31 Detailed flowchart of the special figure stop processing in step S317 of FIG. 31 Detailed flowchart of the large winning opening opening / closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 28 (No. 1) Detailed flowchart of the large winning opening opening / closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 28 (Part 2) Detailed flowchart of the large winning opening opening / closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 28 (No. 3) Flow chart illustrating interrupt processing executed on the sub-control board 90 Detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. 38. Detailed flowchart of the hold command reception process in step S13 of FIG. 39. Detailed flowchart of the look-ahead / button effect pattern setting process in step S138 of FIG. 40. Detailed flowchart of the look-ahead button effect pattern setting process in step S140 of FIG. 40. Detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S16 of FIG. 39. Detailed flowchart of the variation effect pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the advance notice effect pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. 43. Detailed flowchart of reach establishment large chance notice effect pattern setting process in step S165 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of SP reach / SPSP reach notice effect pattern setting process in step S166 of FIG. A flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed on the image / acoustic control board 100. Detailed flowchart of the image display control process in step S71 of FIG. 48.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1 according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Configuration example of gaming machine 1]
First, a configuration example of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. Here, FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 2. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 30 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 30. The gaming machine frame 30 includes a front frame 31 having a decorative surface, a main body frame for attaching the gaming board 2 and the like, and an outer frame for fixing the gaming machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. There is. The front frame 31 supports a glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined distance, and the glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 3 into which the game ball can flow down. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame 31 has a launch handle 32 for launching a game ball, an upper plate 33 for storing a game ball supplied to a launching device (not shown), and an upper plate. A lower plate 34 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in 33 is provided. When the player grasps the launch handle 32 and rotates it clockwise, the game ball stored in the upper plate 33 is guided to the launcher and is launched with a launch intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32. The launched game ball moves along the rail member 4 located on the left side of the game area 3 and then is guided to the upper position of the game area 3 and comes into contact with a game hook, a windmill, or the like provided in the game area 3. As a result, the game area 3 flows down along the game board 2 while changing the moving direction.

A ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the end of the rail member 4, and the ball return prevention piece 6 prevents the game ball once entering the game area 3 from returning to the launcher side. Further, a stop button is provided at a position close to the launch handle 32, and the player can temporarily launch the game ball by operating this stop button without returning the launch handle 32 to the initial posture. It is possible to stop it.

When the player performs "left-handed" by rotating the firing handle 32 by a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak firing intensity, and the game ball flows down the left game area 3L. On the other hand, when the player performs "right-handed" by rotating the launch handle 32 by a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong firing intensity, and the game ball is located above the right upper side of the center decoration body 10. After moving along the rail member 4, it flows down the right game area 3R.

The passage path of the game ball in the left game area 3L is provided with a first starting port 21, a second starting port 22, an opening / closing member 23, and three general winning ports 24 as accessories related to winning and determination ( (See FIG. 2). Further, in the passage path of the game ball in the right game area 3R, the second start opening 22, the opening / closing member 23, one general winning opening 24, the gate 25, and the first large winning opening are used as accessories related to winning and determination. 26, an opening / closing member 27, a second large winning opening 28, and an opening / closing member 29 are provided (see FIG. 2).

In the process of flowing down the game area 3 along the game board 2, the game ball launched from the launching device has the first starting port 21, the second starting port 22, the general winning opening 24, the first large winning opening 26, and the like. You may win a prize in any of the second major winning openings 28. In this case, a predetermined number of prize balls according to the winning place are paid out to the upper plate 33 or the lower plate 34. For example, four prize balls are paid out every time one game ball wins in the first starting port 21, and one prize ball is paid out every time one game ball wins in the second starting port 22. It is paid out, and every time one game ball wins in the general winning opening 24, five prize balls are paid out. In addition, 10 prize balls are paid out every time one game ball wins in the first prize opening 26, and 10 prizes are paid out every time one game ball wins in the second big prize opening 28. The ball is paid out. The game balls that did not win any prize are discharged from the game area 3 through the discharge port formed at the lower end of the game board 2.

A center decorative body 10 is provided in the opening formed in the center of the game board 2. The center decoration body 10 includes a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll, and a warp portion 12 having a warp inlet and a warp outlet at both ends. A game ball flowing down the left game area 3L may enter the warp section 12 from the warp entrance, and the game ball is discharged from the warp exit and guided to the stage section 11. A guide groove is formed at the center of the left and right sides of the stage portion 11 to drop the game ball rolling on the stage portion 11 toward the first starting port 21. Therefore, the game ball guided to the stage portion 11 via the warp portion 12 wins a prize at the first starting port 21 as compared with the game ball that flows down the left game area 3L without passing through the warp portion 12. easy.

The first starting port 21 is a starting area that is always open. The second starting port 22 is a starting region that is normally closed when the opening / closing member 23 as an electric accessory is not operating, and is opened by operating the opening / closing member 23. In the gaming machine 1, when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 21 (or the second starting opening 22), it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. Then, on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), which will be described later, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the symbols (big hit symbols or lost symbols) indicating the result of the above determination are stopped and displayed. Here, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game that opens the first jackpot 26 and the second jackpot 28 is executed.

In the following description, the determination executed in response to the winning of the game ball for the first starting port 21 is referred to as "first special symbol determination", and is executed in response to the winning of the game ball for the second starting port 22. The determination is referred to as "second special symbol determination", and these are collectively referred to as "special symbol determination".

The first large winning opening 26 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. An opening / closing member 27, which is a plate for opening / closing the first winning opening 26, is provided at the opening of the first winning opening 26. The first large winning opening 26 is normally closed by the opening / closing member 27 because the opening / closing member 27 maintains a closed posture forming the same plane as the game board 2. On the other hand, when the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) as the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), the opening / closing member 27 is operated. A jackpot game is executed in which the first prize opening 26 is opened. During this jackpot game, a long open round game is performed in which the opening / closing member 27 maintains an open posture (see FIG. 2) that opens the first prize opening 26 and then returns to a closed posture that closes the first prize opening 26. Be struck. In the long-open round game in which the first large winning opening 26 is opened, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win the first large winning opening 26, or the first large winning opening 26 is opened. It continues until a predetermined time (for example, 25 seconds) elapses (without winning a predetermined number of game balls in the first large winning opening 26). In this way, during the jackpot game, a long-open round game in which the first big winning opening 26 is opened for a long time is performed. Therefore, the player can obtain more prize balls by hitting right during the long opening round game in which the first big winning opening 26 is opened long, as compared with the case where the big hit game is not performed. ..

The second large winning opening 28 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. An opening / closing member 29, which is a blade member for opening / closing the second special winning opening 28, is provided at the opening of the second special winning opening 28. The second large winning opening 28 is normally closed by the opening / closing member 29 (see FIG. 4 (A)). On the other hand, when the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) as the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), the opening / closing member 29 is operated. A jackpot game is executed in which the second prize opening 28 is opened. During this jackpot game, the opening / closing member 29 maintains the open posture (see FIGS. 2, 4 (B) and (C)) for opening the second prize opening 28, and then closes the second prize opening 28. A round game that returns to the closed posture is performed.

As will be described in detail later, in a round game in which the second large winning opening 28 is opened and closed, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can be easily won in the second large winning opening 28. A long-open round game in which the mouth 28 is opened for a long time and a short-open round game in which the second large winning opening 28 is opened for a short time are prepared so that it is extremely difficult to win a game ball in the second large winning opening 28. There is. In a long-opening round game in which the second prize opening 28 is opened for a long time, 100 prize balls (= 10 pieces x 10 counts) are paid out when the player strikes right. Therefore, the player can obtain more prize balls by hitting right during the long opening round game in which the second big winning opening 28 is opened long, as compared with the case where the big hit game is not performed. ..

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined by the main CPU 81 that the jackpot game is to be executed, the operations of the opening / closing member 27 and the opening / closing member 29 are controlled so that the player can acquire the game ball as a game medium. A big hit game is executed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the short opening round game in which the second special winning opening 28 is shortly opened, the opening time, which is the time for the opening / closing member 29 to maintain the open posture of opening the second large winning opening 28, is 0.1. It is set to a very short time of seconds. Therefore, even if the player makes a right-handed hit during the short-open round game of the second prize opening 28, basically, the game ball does not win the second prize opening 28, and the prize ball No payouts will be made.

For convenience of explanation, FIG. 2 shows an open posture in which the opening / closing members 27 and 29 open the large winning openings 26 and 28 when the effect symbol is variablely displayed on the display screen 70 of the image display device 7. Although the state shown in the figure is shown, the opening / closing members 27 and 29 are not actually in the open posture during the variable display of the effect symbol. Further, in each round game in the big hit game, either one of the first big winning opening 26 and the second big winning opening 28 is used, so that these big winning openings are actually used at the same time as shown in FIG. It will not be released.

An opening / closing member 23 (see FIG. 2) is arranged close to the second starting port 22. The opening / closing member 23 can change its posture between a closed posture in which the opening / closing member 23 closes the second starting port 22 and an open posture in which the opening / closing member 23 opens the second starting port 22 (see FIG. 2).

The second starting port 22 is normally closed by the opening / closing member 23. On the other hand, when the game ball hit right by the player passes through the gate 25, the prize ball is not paid out, but it is determined whether or not to open the second starting port 22. Here, when it is determined that the second starting port 22 is opened, the opening / closing member 23 maintains the open posture for a predetermined time and then returns to the closed posture a predetermined number of times. As described above, the second starting port 22 is in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass when the opening / closing member 23 is not operating, whereas the second starting port 22 is in a state in which the game ball is easily passed by operating the opening / closing member 23. Become.

In the following description, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 25 is referred to as "ordinary symbol determination".

The general winning opening 24 is always open like the first starting opening 21, and is a winning opening in which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of winning balls is paid out by winning a game ball. However, unlike the first starting opening 21 and the like, the determination is not made even if the game ball wins in the general winning opening 24.

[Configuration example of main display 40]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the main display 40 in FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 3, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41, a second special symbol display 42, a normal symbol display 43, a first special symbol hold indicator 44, and a second special symbol. It is configured to include a hold indicator 45, a normal figure hold indicator 46, a round indicator 47, a game state indicator 48, a launch direction indicator 49, and the like.

The first special symbol display 41 is configured to have eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and when the first special symbol determination is performed, the symbol is variablely displayed and then the first special symbol is displayed. The determination result of the first special symbol determination is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the determination. Specifically, for example, the eight LEDs are turned on in order to display the variation of the symbol, and each LED is set for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5) in a combination according to the determination result of the first special symbol determination. The symbol is stopped and displayed by turning it on (for seconds).

The second special symbol display 42 is configured to have eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and when the second special symbol determination is performed, the symbol is variablely displayed and then the second special symbol is displayed. The determination result of the second special symbol determination is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the determination. Specifically, for example, the eight LEDs are turned on in order to display the variation of the symbol, and each LED is set for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5) in a combination according to the determination result of the second special symbol determination. The symbol is stopped and displayed by turning it on (for seconds).

The first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42) is notified that it is a jackpot as a symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination). "Symbol" or "Loss symbol" notifying that it is lost is stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine 1, a plurality of jackpot symbols that differ from each other depending on the type of jackpot are prepared, and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the first jackpot 26 and the first jackpot 26 and the opening pattern according to the type of the jackpot symbol are displayed. A jackpot game that opens the second prize opening 28 is performed.

The ordinary symbol display 43 is configured to have two LEDs indicated by "s to t", and when the ordinary symbol determination is performed, the symbol is displayed in a variable manner and then the determination result of the ordinary symbol determination is shown. By stopping and displaying the symbol, the judgment result of the normal symbol determination is notified. Specifically, for example, by alternately lighting the above two LEDs, a variable display of the symbol is performed, and each LED is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a lighting mode according to the judgment result of the normal symbol determination. The symbol is stopped and displayed by turning it on. Here, when the hit symbol is stopped and displayed, an auxiliary game is performed in which the opening / closing member 23 is operated in an opening pattern according to the current gaming state to open the second starting port 22.

In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42 is referred to as a "special symbol", and the symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 43 is referred to as a "normal symbol". It shall be called. Further, the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is called a "first special symbol", and the special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is called a "second special symbol". It may be distinguished.

The first special figure hold indicator 44 is configured to have two LEDs indicated by "u to v", and displays the number of holds for the first special symbol determination depending on the lighting mode of these LEDs. The second special figure hold indicator 45 is configured to have two LEDs indicated by "w to x", and displays the number of holds for the second special symbol determination depending on the lighting mode of these LEDs. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of these reservations is set to "4". The normal figure hold indicator 46 is configured to have two LEDs indicated by "q to r", and displays the number of holds for normal symbol determination depending on the lighting mode of these LEDs.

The round display 47 is used in a jackpot game executed in response to a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol as the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. Displays the number of rounds indicating how many rounds the game is played. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a jackpot game including three round games may be executed, and a jackpot game including ten round games may be executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the round display 47 includes a 3R LED and a 10R LED, and the number of rounds is notified by lighting any of these LEDs.

The game status indicator 48 is configured to have three LEDs indicated by "a1 to a3", and displays the game status of the gaming machine 1 according to the lighting mode of these LEDs. The launch direction indicator 49 is configured to have two LEDs indicated by “y to z”, and displays the launch direction of the game ball according to the lighting mode of these LEDs. That is, it is displayed whether the player should hit left or right.

[Structure example of the production means included in the gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2, the game board 2 and the front frame 31 have various effects, such as a decorative member 13, a movable decorative member 14, a frame lamp 37, a speaker 38, and an effect display 125. An effect first special figure hold indicator 126, an effect second special figure hold indicator 127, and the like are provided. An image display device 7 is provided behind the game board 2.

The decorative member 13 has a built-in board lamp 5 (see FIG. 5) composed of a plurality of LEDs, and changes the lighting and blinking patterns of each LED and changes the emission color of each LED. By doing so, various effects by light are performed.

The movable decorative member 14 is arranged in front of the image display device 7 and behind the decorative member 13. A plurality of LEDs are built in the movable decorative member 14, and the movable decorative member 14 performs a predetermined effect by the movement and / or light of the movable decorative member 14 itself. In the present embodiment, a predetermined space in which the movable decorative member 14 can operate is provided between the game board 2 and the display screen 70 of the image display device 7, and the movable decorative member 14 is along the display screen 70. It is configured to be able to move up and down. The movable decorative member 14 is usually arranged at an initial position (see FIG. 2) in which most of the movable decorative member 14 is hidden behind the decorative member 13 and only the lower end portion of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. On the other hand, the movable decorative member 14 emits light in a predetermined light emitting pattern and emits light on the display screen 70 when a notice effect having a relatively high jackpot reliability is executed by using the image display device 7 or the speaker 38. It falls to the operating position that covers most of it.

The frame lamp 37 is configured to have a plurality of LEDs built in various parts of the front frame 31, and changes the lighting and blinking patterns of each LED and changes the emission color of each LED. Various effects by light are performed.

The image display device 7 is a liquid crystal display device that displays an effect image on the display screen 70, and the player can visually recognize the display screen 70 through an opening formed in the central portion of the game board 2. On the display screen 70, the same number of hold images (hold) as the number of effect symbols, characters and items that notify the determination result of the special symbol determination, and the number of hold of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) are displayed. An effect image including various display objects such as an icon) and a variation suggestion image (corresponding icon) suggesting that a variation display of a special symbol is being performed is displayed. The image display device 7 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display the effect image, and may be another image display device such as an EL display device.

The speaker 38 outputs production sounds such as music, sound, and sound effects in synchronization with or asynchronously with the display production performed on the display screen 70 to perform sound production.

The effect display 125 is configured to have two LEDs, displays the symbol in a variable manner according to the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol, and determines the special symbol in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol and the effect symbol. The symbol that notifies the judgment result of is stopped and displayed. The effect display 125 notifies the determination result of the special symbol determination according to the combination of lighting / extinguishing of each LED and the lighting color.

The first special figure holding indicator 126 is configured to have two LEDs, and is the same as the one displayed on the first special drawing holding indicator 44 depending on the combination of lighting and extinguishing of each LED. 1 Display the number of pending special symbol judgments. The second special figure hold indicator 127 is configured to have two LEDs, and is the same as that displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 45 depending on the combination of turning on and off each LED. 2 Display the number of pending special symbol judgments.

[Structure example of input means included in gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the front frame 31 is provided with a first effect button 35 and a second effect button 36 as input means that can be input by a player. The first effect button 35 is a push button for inputting operation information by being pressed by the player. The second effect button 36 is a push button for the player to input operation information by grasping the grip portion of the second effect button 36 and pressing the second effect button 36. In the gaming machine 1, the effect corresponding to the operation of the first effect button 35 and the second effect button 36 may be performed.

The configuration of the input means is not limited to the one illustrated in this embodiment, and may be another one. That is, for example, in the present embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 1 includes two input means will be described, but the number of input means may be one or three or more. Further, the input means is not limited to the push button, but a touch panel capable of detecting the player's touch operation, for example, an optical sensor capable of detecting the player's hand held over the display screen 70, and a position or position moved by moving it back and forth and left and right. It may be another input means such as a joystick for designating a direction or an operating means that the player can grasp and change the posture.

[Example of internal configuration of the second prize opening 28]
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening / closing control of the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287. An opening / closing member 29 for opening / closing the second special winning opening 28 is provided at the opening of the second special winning opening 28 (see FIGS. 1 and 4 (A)). Further, as illustrated in FIGS. 4A to 4C, inside the second large winning opening 28, a second large winning opening sensor 281, a V winning opening sensor 283, an outlet sensor 284, and a slide member 285 and the like are provided.

The second prize opening sensor 281 detects a game ball that has entered the second prize opening 28, and in the present embodiment, ten game balls are passed each time the game ball passes through the second prize opening sensor 281. The prize ball will be paid out. The V winning opening sensor 283 detects the passage of a game ball through the V winning opening 287 (an example of a special winning area) partitioned by the V winning opening sensor 283. The discharge port sensor 284 detects the passage of the game ball through the discharge port partitioned by the discharge port sensor 284. The slide member 285 guides the game ball that has passed through the second large winning opening sensor 281 to the V winning opening 287 or the discharging port, and is slidable in the left-right direction (width direction of the game machine 1) in FIG. It is configured. 4 (A) and 4 (B) exemplify a state in which the slide member 285 is arranged at the right position for closing the V winning opening 287, and FIGS. 4 (C) and 4 (D) show the slide member 285. An example shows a state in which the V winning opening 287 is arranged at the left position to be opened.

When the big hit game is not performed or during the long opening round game in which the first big winning opening 26 is opened long, the second big winning opening 28 is blocked by the opening / closing member 29 and the V winning opening 287 is closed. It is closed by the slide member 285 (see FIG. 4 (A)). On the other hand, in the round game in which the second special winning opening 28 is opened and closed, the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 can be in the following states.

Specifically, in the round game of opening and closing the second special winning opening 28, as illustrated in FIGS. 4A and 4B, the opening / closing member remains in the state where the slide member 285 is arranged at the right position. The 29 may rotate to open the second prize opening 28. In this case, although the second big winning opening 28 is open, the V winning opening 287 is still blocked by the slide member 285, so even if the game ball enters the second big winning opening 28, the game ball is still closed. It does not pass through the V winning opening 287, but passes through the discharge port sensor 284.

Further, in the round game of opening and closing the second special winning opening 28, as illustrated in FIGS. 4 (B) and 4 (C), the slide member 285 is on the right while the second big winning opening 28 is open. The V winning opening 287 may be opened by moving from the position to the left position. In this case, since both the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are open, the game ball that has entered the second major winning opening 28 passes through the V winning opening 287 (that is, the V winning opening 287). It will be detected by the sensor 283).

The V winning opening sensor 283 functions as a so-called probability change switch, and as described above, the game ball wins a V prize when both the second major winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are in the open state. In the case of (the game ball is detected by the V winning opening sensor 283), the game is controlled in the "probability variation game state" described later after the jackpot game with the V winning is completed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not win a V when both the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are in the open state, after the big hit game is completed, the "time saving game state" described later The game will be controlled by.

Further, in the round game of opening and closing the second prize opening 28, as illustrated in FIG. 4D, the opening and closing member 29 is not operating, so that the second prize opening 28 is closed. In addition, the slide member 285 may move from the right position to the left position, and the V winning opening 287 may be in an open state. In this case, although the V winning opening 287 is open, the game ball does not enter the second major winning opening 28 because the second major winning opening 28 is in a difficult state of entry.

It should be noted that the transparent member provided at the position corresponding to the area including the second large winning opening sensor 281, the V winning opening sensor 283, the discharge port sensor 284, the slide member 285, etc. corresponds to the V winning opening sensor 283. The letter "V" is written at the position where it is to be displayed (see FIG. 2). Therefore, the player can easily identify the position of the V winning opening sensor 283 (the position of the V winning opening 287) by looking at the letter "V".

[Configuration of control device included in gaming machine 1]
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1.
On the back side of the game board 2, a control device for controlling the operation of the game machine 1 is provided. As illustrated in FIG. 5, the control device of the gaming machine 1 is a main control board 80 that controls the progress of a game using a gaming ball, and a sub that comprehensively controls the effect based on information from the main control board 80. It is composed of a control board 90, an image / acoustic control board 100 that controls an effect by an image or sound, a lamp control board 120 that controls an effect by various lamps or movable members, and the like. In the present embodiment, the main control board 80 functions as a game control unit that controls the progress of the game, and the sub control board 90, the image / acoustic control board 100, and the lamp control board 120 function as the effect control unit that controls the effect. .. The configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the sub control board 90, the image / acoustic control board 100, and the lamp control board 120 may be composed of one board.

<Structure example of main control board 80>
The main control board 80 includes a main CPU 81, a main ROM 82, and a main RAM 83. The main CPU 81 performs various arithmetic processes related to the determination and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the program or the like stored in the main ROM 82. The main RAM 83 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the main CPU 81 when executing the program, or as a work area for data processing.

The main control board 80 includes a first start port sensor 211, a second start port sensor 221 and a gate sensor 251. 284, a general winning opening sensor 241, a second starting opening solenoid 222, a first winning opening solenoid 262, a second winning opening solenoid 282, and a V winning opening solenoid 286 are connected. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes four general winning opening sensors 241 corresponding to the four general winning opening 24, but in FIG. 5, for convenience of explanation, only one general winning opening sensor 241 is provided. It is written.

The first start port sensor 211 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 21, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The second start port sensor 221 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 22, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The gate sensor 251 detects the passage of the game ball through the gate 25 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The first large winning opening sensor 261 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the first large winning opening 26, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The second special winning opening sensor 281 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the second special winning opening 28, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The V winning opening sensor 283 detects the passage of the game ball through the V winning opening 287 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The discharge port sensor 284 detects the passage of the game ball to the discharge port and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The general winning opening sensor 241 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening 24, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80.

The second starting port solenoid 222 is an electric solenoid that is connected to the opening / closing member 23 so as to be able to transmit a driving force, and operates the opening / closing member 23 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to start the second start. Open and close the mouth 22. The first large winning opening solenoid 262 is an electric solenoid that is connected to the opening / closing member 27 so as to be able to transmit a driving force, and operates the opening / closing member 27 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to operate the first opening / closing member 27. The large winning opening 26 is opened and closed. The second large winning opening solenoid 282 is an electric solenoid that is connected to the opening / closing member 29 so as to be able to transmit a driving force, and operates the opening / closing member 29 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to operate the second opening / closing member 29. The large winning opening 28 is opened and closed. The V winning opening solenoid 286 is an electric solenoid that is connected to the slide member 285 so as to be able to transmit a driving force, and operates the slide member 285 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to operate the V winning opening 287. Opens and closes.

Although not shown in the figure, the gaming machine 1 controls a drive motor that sends out a gaming ball from a ball tank provided on the back surface side of the gaming board 2 to supply the gaming ball to the upper plate 33 or the lower plate 34. It is equipped with a payout control board. When the main CPU 81 receives a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 211, the second starting port sensor 221 or the first winning opening sensor 261 or the second winning opening sensor 281 or the general winning opening sensor 241, the main CPU 81 receives a detection signal. The payout control board is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball has won a prize, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on the information from the payout control board.

Further, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 211 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Further, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the second start port sensor 221 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Here, the various random numbers are, specifically, jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers.

The jackpot random number is a random number for determining a jackpot or a loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game, etc.) when it is determined to be a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach when it is determined that there is a loss. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The main CPU 81 acquires these random numbers at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 21 (or the second start port 22), and first, the acquired jackpot random numbers are stored in the main ROM 82 as a predetermined random number. It is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game based on whether or not it matches the numerical value (winning value). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the jackpot random number matches the winning value, the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number is stored in the main ROM 82 (compared with the symbol random number). ) Determine the type of jackpot based on which random number value of a predetermined random number matches.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is not executed based on the fact that the acquired jackpot random number does not match the winning value, the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number is stored in the main ROM 82. Based on whether or not it matches a predetermined random number value (compared with the reach random number), it is determined whether to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach. Further, the main CPU 81 determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol when displaying the special symbol in a variable manner based on the fluctuation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, regardless of the result of the determination based on the jackpot random number. As a result, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is to be executed and determines the type of jackpot, the main CPU 81 opens and closes the first jackpot 26 (opening / closing member 27) via the first jackpot solenoid 262 according to the type of jackpot. (Operation) is controlled, the opening and closing of the second winning opening 28 (operation of the opening / closing member 29) is controlled via the second winning opening solenoid 282, and the opening and closing of the V winning opening 287 is controlled via the V winning opening solenoid 286. By controlling (the operation of the slide member 285), the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot is executed.

Further, the main CPU 81 acquires a random number (ordinary symbol random number) at the timing when the detection signal from the gate sensor 251 is input, and executes the ordinary symbol determination using the acquired ordinary symbol random number. Then, when it is determined that the second starting port 22 is to be opened as a result of this normal symbol determination, the opening / closing (operation of the opening / closing member 23) of the second starting port 22 is controlled via the second starting port solenoid 222. An auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 22 is executed.

Further, on the main control board 80, a first special symbol display 41, a second special symbol display 42, a normal symbol display 43, a first special symbol hold indicator 44, a second special symbol hold indicator 45, and a general one are used. Figure Hold indicator 46, round indicator 47, game status indicator 48, launch direction indicator 49 are connected.

The main CPU 81 controls these indicators 41 to 49 constituting the main indicator 40 to execute the above-mentioned display process based on FIG.

<Configuration example of sub-control board 90>
The sub control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91, a sub ROM 92, a sub RAM 93, and an RTC (real time clock) 94. The sub CPU 91 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the effect based on the program stored in the sub ROM 92. The sub RAM 93 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the sub CPU 91 when executing the program, or as a work area for data processing. The RTC94 measures the current date and time (date or time).

The first effect button detection sensor 96 and the second effect button detection sensor 97 are connected to the sub control board 90. When the first effect button 35 (see FIG. 1) is operated, the first effect button detection sensor 96 outputs operation information (operation signal) indicating that fact to the sub control board 90. When the second effect button 36 (see FIG. 1) is operated, the second effect button detection sensor 97 outputs operation information (operation signal) indicating that fact to the sub control board 90.

The sub CPU 91 sets the effect content based on the game information related to the special symbol determination, the normal symbol determination, the jackpot game, etc. transmitted from the main control board 80. At that time, the input of the operation information from the first effect button 35 and the second effect button 36 may be accepted, and the effect content corresponding to the operation information may be set. The sub CPU 91 transmits a command instructing the execution of the effect of the set effect content to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

<Structure example of image / sound control board 100>
The image / sound control board 100 controls the image display by the image display device 7 and the output of the effect sound by the speaker 38. In the present embodiment, the image / acoustic control board 100 includes an image / acoustic control CPU 101, a control ROM 102, a control RAM 103, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 104, a CGROM 105, a VRAM 106, an acoustic DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 107, an acoustic ROM 108, and a SDRAM 109. And an amplifier 110.

The control ROM 102 is composed of a mask ROM, and various tables such as a control program of the image / sound control CPU 101, a display list generation program for generating a display list, and a display list creation table used for a process of creating a display list. Is remembered. Here, the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis, and includes the type of image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, the display priority, the display magnification, and the rotation. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The control RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used by the audiovisual control CPU 101 when executing the control program, and as a work area for data processing and the like.

The image / sound control CPU 101 displays image data stored in the CGROM 105 with respect to the VDP 104 based on the control program, various tables such as the display list creation table, commands received from the sub control board 90, and the like. Instruct to display on. This instruction is mainly given by the output of the display list. Further, the image / acoustic control CPU 101 instructs the acoustic DSP 107 to output the acoustic data stored in the acoustic ROM 108 from the speaker 38.

The CGROM 105 stores the effect data necessary for executing the variation effect associated with the variation display of the special symbol, the effect associated with the jackpot game, and the like. The CGROM 105 is composed of a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, etc., and is a sprite data (one image data) or a plurality of image data composed of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). The movie data, etc., which consists of a collection of images, is compressed and stored. The pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 105 stores the palette data or the like in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression.

It should be noted that only a part of the image data stored in the CGROM 105 may be compressed. Further, as a method for compressing movie data, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 106 is composed of an SRAM capable of writing and reading image data at high speed, and is not shown in the figure, but is configured to have a display list storage area, an expansion storage area, a frame buffer, and the like. ing.

The display list storage area temporarily stores the display list output from the image / sound control CPU 101. The expanded storage area stores image data that has been decompressed after being read from the CGROM 105. The frame buffer is a frame buffer that is also used for drawing and displaying the image data displayed on the display screen 70.

The VDP 104 decompresses the image data stored in the compressed state in the CGROM 105, and stores the decompressed image data in the decompressed storage area. Further, the VDP 104 performs drawing processing on the frame buffer using the image data stored in the expansion storage area based on the display list stored in the display list storage area. Further, the VDP 104 generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the frame buffer, and outputs the generated RGB signal to the image display device 7.

An acoustic ROM 108, an SDRAM 109, and an amplifier 110 are connected to the acoustic DSP 107. The acoustic ROM 108 stores various acoustic data related to music, voice, sound effects, warning sounds, and the like. The SDRAM 109 is used as a work area for data processing and the like by the acoustic DSP 107. The acoustic DSP 107 reads the acoustic data corresponding to the instruction from the image / acoustic control CPU 101 from the acoustic ROM 108 to the SDRAM 109, executes data processing, and outputs the acoustic data after the data processing to the speaker 38 (via the amplifier 110). The amplifier 110 adjusts the volume according to the instruction regarding the volume obtained from the image / sound control CPU 101 via the sound DSP 107, and outputs the sound data to the speaker 38.

In this embodiment, the case where the VDP is responsible for drawing management and the acoustic DSP is responsible for sound management will be described, but in other embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which the VDP is responsible for both drawing management and sound management. You may. In this case, it is not necessary to separately provide an acoustic DSP.

<Configuration example of lamp control board 120>
The lamp control board 120 includes a lamp CPU 121, a lamp ROM 122, and a lamp RAM 123, and includes a frame lamp 37, a board lamp 5, a movable decorative member 14, an effect display 125, an effect first special figure hold indicator 126, and an effect second. The special figure hold indicator 127 is connected. The lamp ROM 122 stores a program executed by the lamp CPU 121, light emission pattern data, operation pattern data, and the like. Here, the light emission pattern data is data indicating each light emission pattern of the frame lamp 37, the board surface lamp 5, the LED built in the movable decorative member 14, and the like. The motion pattern data is data indicating an motion pattern of the movable decorative member 14 and the like.

Based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 122, the lamp CPU 121 includes a frame lamp 37, a board lamp 5, a movable decorative member 14, an effect display 125, an effect first special figure hold indicator 126, and an effect second special figure hold. Performs arithmetic processing when controlling the operation of the display 127 and the like.

The lamp CPU 121 reads the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 from the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 into the lamp RAM 123, and reads the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the movable decorative member. It controls the light emission of the LED built in 14. Further, the lamp CPU 121 reads the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 from the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 into the lamp RAM 123, and operates the movable decorative member 14. Control the drive.

Further, the lamp CPU 121 controls the variation display and the stop display of the symbol on the effect display 125 based on the command from the sub control board 90. Further, the lamp CPU 121 displays the number of holds related to the first special symbol determination by the effect first special figure hold indicator 126, and the effect second special figure hold indicator 127 based on the command from the sub control board 90. 2 Controls the display of the number of holds related to the special symbol determination.

[About game status]
Next, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming is controlled in any one of the three gaming states of "normal gaming state", "probability variable gaming state", and "time saving gaming state".

The "normal game state" is a support function (so-called) that supports a winning of a game ball for the second starting port 22 while performing a special symbol determination in a low probability state in which the probability of being determined to execute a jackpot game is relatively low. It is a gaming state in which a function called "electric support" or the like) is not provided. In the normal game state, the probability that the jackpot game will be executed by the special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/210) (see FIG. 6A). Further, the probability that the second starting port 22 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/11), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is a relatively long time (for example, 20 seconds). And when it is determined that the second starting port 22 is to be opened, the opening time of the second starting port 22 is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 second × 1 time).

The "probability variation game state" is a game state in which the special symbol determination is performed in a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to execute the jackpot game is relatively high, and the above support function is provided. That is, in the probabilistic game state, the probability that the jackpot game will be executed by the special symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 1/60) (see FIG. 6A). Further, the probability that the second starting port 22 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 11/11), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a relatively short time (for example, 1.5). Seconds), and the opening time of the second starting port 22 when it is determined to open the second starting port 22 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.5 seconds × 3 times).

The "time saving game state" is a game state in which the special symbol determination is performed in the above-mentioned low probability state and the electric chew support function is provided. That is, in the time-saving game state, the probability that the jackpot game will be executed by the special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/210). Further, the probability that the second starting port 12 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 11/11), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a relatively short time (for example, 1.5). The opening time of the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.5 seconds × 3 times) when it is determined that the second starting port 12 is opened.

Comparing these gaming states with respect to the variation time of the special symbol, the variation time of the special symbol in the "probability variation game state" and the "short-time gaming state" is relative to the variation time of the special symbol in the "normal gaming state". It is easy to set a short time. In addition, the probability that it is determined to execute the special game (big hit probability), the probability that it is determined to open the second starting port 22 (the winning probability of the normal symbol determination), and the variation of the ordinary symbol shown in the explanation of each game state. Needless to say, the time and the opening time of the second starting port 22 are merely examples, and may be other probabilities or times.

In the following description, a state in which the game ball can easily win a prize in the second starting port 22 due to the above support function is referred to as a "high base state", and the support function is not provided. A state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 22 is referred to as a "low base state". In the present embodiment, the "normal game state" corresponds to the low base state, and the "probability variation game state" and the "time saving game state" correspond to the high base state.

[Game flow]
A game ball hit by the player to the right does not win a prize in the first starting port 21, but may win a prize in the second starting port 22. However, in the low base state, it is difficult to open the second starting port 22, and even if it is opened, the opening time is short. Therefore, when the game is controlled in a low base state (corresponding to the "normal game state" in the present embodiment), the player decides to play the game by left-handed aiming at the first starting port 21. Become.

When the left-handed game ball wins the first starting port 21 in the normal game state, the first special symbol determination is executed, and after the first special symbol is variablely displayed, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is displayed. As the first special symbol to be shown, the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol is stopped and displayed.

Here, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed and the game state does not change. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, a jackpot game in which a predetermined number of round games are performed according to the jackpot symbol is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, a "probability variation game state" or a "time saving game" is executed. The game will be controlled by the "state".

When the game state shifts to the "probability variation game state" or the "time saving game state" when the jackpot game ends, that is, when the game state shifts from the low base state to the high base state, the game ball to the second starting port 22 With the above-mentioned support function that facilitates winning a prize, the game ball is more easily won in the second starting port 22 than in the first starting port 21. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the high base state, the player plays the game by right-handed aiming at the second starting port 22. Further, when both the right of the first special symbol determination and the right of the second special symbol determination are reserved, the second special symbol determination is executed with priority over the first special symbol determination. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state, the second special symbol determination is basically performed.

If the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state, the game is basically controlled in the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game ends, but the time-saving game The game may be controlled depending on the state. On the other hand, if the jackpot cannot be assigned in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state, the game state will be returned from the probabilistic game state (or the time-saving game state) to the normal game state.

[About special symbol judgment using random numbers]
Next, the determination process using the jackpot random number and the symbol random number will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot random number and the symbol random number. In the explanatory diagrams relating to each random number illustrated in FIGS. 6 and 6 and thereafter, the range in which the random numbers can be taken is set to a range smaller than the actual range in order to facilitate the explanation. In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the first start port 21 (or the second start port 22), acquisition information such as a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number is acquired.

<Processing based on jackpot random numbers>
The jackpot random number exemplified in FIG. 6A is a random number used in the jackpot determination process (step S308 in FIG. 31) as to whether or not to execute the jackpot game, and the probability of being determined to execute the jackpot game is high. Each of the relatively low low probability state and the high probability state in which the probability of being determined to execute the jackpot game is relatively high is set individually.

In the present embodiment, four winning values are stored in the main ROM 82 regarding the low probability state, and the main CPU 81 corresponds to the low probability state (in the present embodiment, the "normal game state" and the "time saving game state" correspond to this. ), And when the acquired jackpot random number matches any of these four winning values, it is determined that the jackpot game is executed. Further, regarding the high probability state (in this embodiment, the "probability variation game state" corresponds to this), 14 winning values are stored in the main ROM 82, and are acquired when the game is controlled in the high probability state. When the jackpot random number is matched with any of these 14 winning values, it is determined that the jackpot game is executed.

In this embodiment, the jackpot random number can take 840 values of "0" to "839" in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (see FIG. 6A). Therefore, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/210 (= 4/840), and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/60 (= 14/840).

<Processing based on symbol random numbers>
When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is to be executed, which of the random number values preset for each type of jackpot matches the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used for the determination. Determine the type of jackpot based on. In other words, the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42) is selected as the jackpot symbol.

(Type of jackpot related to the first special symbol judgment)
As illustrated in FIG. 6B, in the present embodiment, as the type of jackpot that can be won according to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 21 in the normal game state, "3R probability variation A". "And" 3R normal "are available.

Here, in the "3R probability variation A" (see FIG. 6B), the second big winning opening 28 is opened for a long time in response to the stop display of the big hit symbol X1 on the first special symbol display 41. A total of two long-open round games (first round game) and two long-open round games (second to third round games) that open the first prize opening 26 for a long time. This is a jackpot in which a jackpot game consisting of three long open round games is executed.

If the "3R Probability A" is won, both the second major winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened for a long time in the first round game. Therefore, the player can pass the game ball through the V winning opening 287 by simply hitting the right side, and even one game ball is used by the V winning opening sensor 283 during the first round game. If it is detected, the game will be controlled in the "probability change game state" after the jackpot game is completed.

In this embodiment, after the jackpot game related to the "3R probability variation A" is completed, the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) and the second special symbol (or the first special symbol) are performed in the "probability variation game state". The number of times the variation display is executed (the number of STs in FIG. 6B) is set to 100, and if it is not determined to be a big hit in the middle, the probability changes until 100 special symbol determinations are executed. The game state is continued. Then, if all of the 100 special symbol determinations are lost, 100 times of time saving games are given thereafter. Here, the "time saving game" means a second special symbol determination (or a first special symbol determination) executed in the "time saving game state" and a second special symbol (or a second special symbol) executed in response to the special symbol determination. It means a game including the variable display of the first special symbol).

On the other hand, in the "3R normal" (see FIG. 6B), the second big winning opening 28 is briefly opened in response to the stop display of the big hit symbol X2 on the first special symbol display 41. A total of 3 times, including a short-open round game (1st round game) and 2 long-open round games (2nd to 3rd round round games) that open the 1st prize opening 26 for a long time. This is a jackpot in which a jackpot game consisting of the round games of is executed. When this "3R normal" is won, in the first round game, basically, the prize ball is not paid out because the game ball does not win in the second large winning opening 28. Therefore, when the "3R normal" is won, the number of long-open round games executed during the big hit game is two, so that the "3R normal" can be said to be a real two-round big hit.

If this "3R normal" is won, a short-open round game in which the second large winning opening 28 is short-opened is executed as the first round game. Therefore, the game ball does not win a V prize during the jackpot game related to the 3R normal, and the game is controlled in the "short-time game state" after the jackpot game related to the "3R normal" is completed. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of time reductions for the "3R normal" is set to 100 times, and the jackpot symbol X2 (notifying that the "3R normal" has been won) is displayed on the first special symbol display 41. When the jackpot game is executed in response to the stop display, if it is not determined to be a jackpot in the middle, the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is executed 100 times after the jackpot game is completed. The game is controlled in a time-saving game state until it is played.

In this way, the "3R probability variation A" is a big hit in which the number of STs is "100" and the number of time reductions (the number of time reduction games) is "100", whereas the "3R normal" is a big hit. It is a big hit in which the number of STs is "0" and the number of time reductions is "100" (see FIG. 6B).

By the way, even though the right to control the game in the "probability change game state" after the jackpot game is completed by winning the "3R probability change A", for example, due to a ball jam in the game area 3, 1 It is conceivable that a situation may occur in which the game ball is not detected by the V winning opening sensor 283 during the round game of the first round. Therefore, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment relates to the "3R probability variation A" so that the player can easily aim for the jackpot after the jackpot game is completed even when such a situation occurs. If the game ball does not win a V prize during the first round game, 100 time-saving games will be granted after the jackpot game is completed. That is, the same game control as after the end of the jackpot game related to the "3R normal" is performed.

In the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is a jackpot, a random number value for determining the type of the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 82. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 6B, 50 random values are stored for the “3R probability variation A” and 50 random values are stored for the “3R normal”. There is.

In the present embodiment, the range in which the symbol random numbers can be taken is set to 100 from "0" to "99", and is based on the jackpot random numbers acquired in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 21. If it is determined to be a jackpot, "3R probability variation A" is selected at a rate of 50% (= 50/100 x 100) as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, and "3R normal" is also 50%. It is selected at a ratio of (= 50/100 × 100) (see FIG. 6 (B)).

Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, the probability that the jackpot symbol X1 indicating "3R probability variation A" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 and "3R normal" are displayed. The probability that the jackpot symbol X2 shown is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is 50%.

In this way, when the result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "3R probability variation A" or "3R normal", in both cases, the player will be in a high base state after the jackpot game is completed. , The right-handed game aimed at the gate 25 and the second starting port 22 will be performed.

(Type of jackpot related to the second special symbol judgment)
As illustrated in FIG. 6C, as the types of jackpots related to the second special symbol determination executed in response to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 22, "10R probability variation A" and "10R" There are four types, "Probability B", "3R Probability B", and "3R Probability C".

Here, in the "10R probability variation A" (see FIG. 6C), the second big winning opening 28 (and the V winning opening) 28 (and V winning opening) correspond to the stop display of the jackpot symbol Y1 on the second special symbol display 42. One long-opening round game (1st round game) that opens 287) for a long time, and 9 long-opening round games (2nd to 10th rounds) that long-opens the 1st prize opening 26 A jackpot game in which a jackpot game consisting of a total of 10 long-open round games including (game) is executed.

The "10R probability variation B" (see FIG. 6C) is the same as the case where the "10R probability variation A" is won in response to the stop display of the jackpot symbol Y2 on the second special symbol display 42. One long-opening round game (first round game) that opens the two major winning openings 28 (and V winning opening 287) for a long time, and nine long-opening round games that open the first large winning opening 26 for a long time. This is a jackpot in which a jackpot game consisting of a total of 10 long-open round games including (2nd to 10th round games) is executed.

On the other hand, when the "3R probability variation B" is won, the jackpot symbol Y3 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, and when the "3R probability variation C" is won, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 42. Y4 is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 6C). If the "3R Probability B" or "3R Probability C" is won, the second major winning opening 28 (and V winning) is the same as when the "3R Probability A" (see FIG. 6B) is won. One long-opening round game (1st round game) that opens the mouth 287) long and 2 long-opening round games that open the 1st prize opening 26 long (2nd to 3rd rounds) Round game) and a total of three long open round games including are executed.

In this way, when the "10R probability variation A" is won, when the "10R probability variation B" is won, when the "3R probability variation B" is won, or when the "3R probability variation C" is won, whichever Also in this case, both the second large winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened for a long time during the first round game. Therefore, the player can easily acquire the right to play the game in the "probability changing game state" after the end of the big hit game, as long as he / she hits right during the first round game related to these big hits. be able to.

Regarding these four types of jackpots related to the second special symbol determination, the above-mentioned ST number and time reduction number are set as follows. That is, for "10R probability variation A" and "3R probability variation B", both the number of STs and the number of time reductions are set to "100", and for "10R probability variation B" and "3R probability variation C", ST. The number of times is set to "100" and the number of time reductions is set to "0". Therefore, when "10R probability variation B" or "3R probability variation C" is won, if all 100 special symbol judgments after the end of the jackpot game are lost, the game state is "normal game state". On the other hand, if "10R Probability A" or "3R Probability B" is won, the game status will be changed if all 100 special symbol judgments after the big hit game are lost. It will shift from the "probability change game state" to the "time saving game state".

Therefore, the probability that the player will win the jackpot in the high base state is that when the player wins the "10R probability variation A" or "3R probability variation B", the player wins the "10R probability variation B" or "3R probability variation C". It can be said that it is higher than.

In the present embodiment, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, a random number value for determining the type of the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 82. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 6C, 30 random values are stored for "10 probability variation A" and 45 random values are stored for "10R probability variation B". , 10 random values are stored for "3 probability variation B", and 15 random values are stored for "3 probability variation C".

In the present embodiment, as described above, the range in which the symbol random numbers can be taken is set to 100 of "0" to "99", and the game balls are acquired in response to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 21. When a jackpot is determined based on a jackpot random number, "10R probability variation A" is selected at a rate of 30% (= 30/100 x 100) as the type of jackpot related to the second special symbol determination, and "10R probability variation B" is selected. Is selected at a rate of 45% (= 45/100 x 100), "3R probability variation B" is selected at a rate of 10% (= 10/100 x 100), and "3R probability variation C" is selected at a ratio of 15% (=). It is selected at a ratio of 15/100 x 100) (see FIG. 6 (C)).

Therefore, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, the probability that the jackpot symbol Y1 indicating "10R probability variation A" is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is 30%. The probability that the jackpot symbol Y2 indicating "10R probability variation B" is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is 45%, and the jackpot symbol Y3 indicating "3R probability variation B" is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42. The probability of being displayed is 10%, and the probability that the jackpot symbol Y4 indicating "3R probability variation C" is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is 15%.

<Processing based on reach random numbers>
When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is not executed, the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used for the determination is either a random number value corresponding to the effect with reach or a random number value corresponding to the effect without reach. Based on whether it matches the random number value of, it is determined whether to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach.

Although not shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, 10 random numbers are stored in the main ROM 82 for the effect with reach, and the acquired reach random numbers are the 10 random numbers in the main CPU 81. If it matches any of the above, it is decided to perform a production with reach. Further, 90 random number values are stored for the non-reach effect, and when the acquired reach random number matches any of these 90 random numbers, the main CPU 81 performs the no-reach effect. decide. In the present embodiment, the range in which the reach random number can be taken is set to "0" to "99", and when it is determined that the jackpot game is not executed, the rate at which the reach effect is performed is 10% (= 10 /). 100 × 100), and the ratio of no reach effect (ratio of non-reach effect) is 90% (= 90/100 × 100).

When the main CPU 81 decides to perform the effect with reach, the main CPU 81 selects a variation pattern in which the variation effect pattern of the effect symbol accompanied by the reach effect is selected by the sub-control board 90 as the variation pattern of the special symbol. On the contrary, when it is decided to perform the non-reach effect, as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation pattern in which the variation effect pattern of the effect symbol without the reach effect is selected by the sub-control board 90 is selected.

[About the flow of the game]
Next, the flow of the game will be described with reference to FIG. 7. Here, FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the gaming machine 1. Due to the board structure of the game board 2, the game ball launched in the left game area 3L can win a prize in the first starting port 21, while the game ball launched in the right game area 3R wins a prize in the first starting port 21. There is no such thing. Further, in the normal gaming state, it is difficult for the second starting port 22 to be in the open state, and even if it is in the open state, the opening time of the second starting port 22 is extremely short, and the game ball is placed in the second starting port 22. The chances of winning are extremely low. Therefore, there is no merit for the player to hit right in the normal gaming state. As is clear from these facts, in the normal game state, it is easier to hit the jackpot when the game ball is launched into the left game area 3L than when it is launched into the right game area 3R (special symbol determination is easier to be executed). Is. For this reason, the player strikes left in the normal gaming state.

When the left-handed game ball wins the first starting port 21 in the normal game state, the first special symbol determination is executed, and after the first special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 41. , The first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing", the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", one of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 (see FIG. 6B) is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, and the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is displayed. The jackpot game corresponding to is executed. These jackpot games are as described above based on FIG. 6 (B).

When the judgment result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "big hit", when the jackpot symbol (big hit symbol X1: see FIG. 6 (B)) for notifying the probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed (FIG. 7 (A). ), And when the jackpot symbol (big hit symbol X2: see FIG. 6 (B)) for notifying the normal jackpot is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 7 (D)).

Here, when the jackpot symbol X1 for notifying the probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game described above is executed based on FIG. 6B. When this jackpot game is executed, the game ball wins a V prize during the long open round game (during the first round game) in which the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened for a long time. After the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state (see FIG. 7B). As described above, this probabilistic gaming state continues until 100 special symbol determinations (and variable display of special symbols) are performed unless it is determined to be a big hit in the middle. On the other hand, if the game ball does not win a V prize due to, for example, a ball clogging in the game area 3, even though the jackpot game including the above-mentioned long open round game is executed, after the jackpot game ends, , The game is controlled in a time-saving game state that can be continued until the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is executed 100 times (see FIG. 7C).

Here, in the probabilistic game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol determination performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 25 is set to a relatively high probability (11/11 in the present embodiment), and is also normal. The opening time of the second starting port 22 when the symbol determination is won is set to a relatively long time (1.5 seconds x 3 times in this embodiment). Therefore, in the probabilistic gaming state, it is easier to draw a big hit (a special symbol determination is easier to be executed) when the game ball is launched into the right gaming area 3R than when it is launched into the left gaming area 3L. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state, the player strikes right. This also applies when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, which is the high base state as in the probabilistic game state.

When the right-handed game ball wins the second starting port 22 while the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state, the second special symbol determination is executed, and the second special symbol display 42 displays the second special symbol. Is displayed in a variable manner, and then the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "missing", the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit", one of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y4 (see FIG. 6 (C)) is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol of the probability variation jackpot (FIG. 7 (F)). (See), the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol displayed as stopped is executed. Here, if the game ball wins a V prize during the jackpot game, the game is controlled again in the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 7B), and the game ball does not win a V prize during the jackpot game. In this case, after the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled in the time-saving game state (see FIG. 7C).

Further, when the right-handed game ball wins the second starting port 22 while the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, the second special symbol determination is executed, and the second special symbol display 42 displays the second. After the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "missing", the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit", one of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y4 (see FIG. 6 (C)) is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol of the probability variation jackpot (FIG. 7 (I)). (See), the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol displayed as stopped is executed. Here, if the game ball wins a V prize during the jackpot game, the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 7 (J)), and the game ball does not win a V prize during the jackpot game. In that case, after the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled again in the time-saving game state (see FIG. 7 (K)).

If a big hit is never determined in the time-saving game state that continues until the special symbol determination (and the variation display of the special symbol) is performed 100 times, the game state is returned from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. This is the case (see FIG. 7 (L)).

Further, as described above based on FIG. 6C, the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is given "10R probability variation A" and "10R probability variation A" in which 100 probability variation games are followed by 100 time reduction games. "3R probability variation B" and "10R probability variation B" and "3R probability variation C" in which a time saving game is not given after 100 probability variation games are prepared. Therefore, when the game shifts to the probability variation game state with the end of the jackpot game related to "10R probability variation A" or "3R probability variation B", once until 100 special symbol determinations (and special symbol variation display) are performed. If it is not determined to be a big hit, the game will shift to a time-saving game state in which the game continues until 100 times of time-saving games are performed (see FIG. 7 (H)). On the other hand, when the game shifts to the probability variation game state with the end of the jackpot game related to "10R probability variation B" or "3R probability variation C", once until 100 special symbol determinations (and special symbol variation display) are performed. If it is not determined to be a big hit, the gaming state will be returned from the probabilistic gaming state to the normal gaming state (see FIG. 7 (G)).

[About variable production]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects are performed on the display screen 70 as the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed. The variation effect performed on the display screen 70 with the variation display of the first special symbol will be described.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 21 and the first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol is changed and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and then the first special symbol is displayed. The first special symbol indicating the determination result of the symbol determination is stopped and displayed. The display screen 70 is provided with an effect symbol display area 73 (see FIG. 2) in which an effect symbol for notifying the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is displayed, and the display screen 70 is provided. Then, along with the variable display of the first special symbol, a variable effect including the variable display of the effect symbol is performed (see FIG. 2). Then, when the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed for the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected when the first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. The effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination.

A so-called reach effect may be performed during such a variable display of the effect symbol. Specifically, in the effect symbol display area 73 of the display screen 70, for example, a part of the effect symbol symbol sequence in which the numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction from the bottom to the top is in the horizontal direction. Three columns are displayed, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variable display (scroll display) is performed so that these symbol columns scroll from top to bottom. On the other hand, when the reach effect is performed, for example, the left column effect symbol (left symbol) and the right column effect symbol (right symbol) are displayed before all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed. Pseudo-stop so that they do not stop completely in order or at the same time. FIG. 2 illustrates a state in which three symbols are pseudo-stopped as the left symbol, the same three symbols are pseudo-stopped as the right symbol, and the symbol row in the middle row continues the scroll display. In addition, the pseudo stop is an effect of swinging the effect symbol on the spot with almost no movement, and in the following description, the main stop (sometimes referred to simply as "stop display") in which the effect symbol is completely stopped. ), It may be called a pseudo stop.

When the same effect symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line, the reach is established, and the reach effect is performed to expect the player to have three identical effect symbols. In this reach effect, the effect symbols (middle symbols) constituting the middle row symbol row are scrolled at a low speed so that the player can identify them in a state where the reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are pseudo-stopped, and finally. , A medium symbol common to the reach symbol, or a medium symbol different from the reach symbol is stopped on the effective line to notify the winner.

Although detailed description is omitted, other display objects such as characters and items are used for such a reach effect in addition to the effect symbol. Further, in the following description, in the variable effect in which the reach effect is performed, the effect performed until the reach is established may be referred to as "pre-reach effect".

The types of reach effects will be described in detail later, but when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "loss", three effect symbols indicating reach loss eyes (for example, "323") are pseudo-stopped in order to notify the loss. Then, as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, these three effect symbols are stopped. On the other hand, when the reach effect is not performed, the three effect symbols indicating the disjointed eyes (for example, "629") are pseudo-stopped in order to notify the loss, and the loss symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. Along with this, these three production symbols are finally stopped. In this way, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not executed, the three effect symbols are pseudo-stopped at the reach loss eye or the loose eye indicating the loss, and then the main stop is performed to notify the loss (the jackpot game is not executed). Loss notification effect is executed.

When this loss notification effect is executed, the jackpot game is not executed, and if the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the first special symbol and the effect symbol are used for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds). After the stop display is performed, the reserved first special symbol determination is performed, and the next variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to this determination is started.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", the reach effect is usually executed during the variable display of the first special symbol, and doublets (for example, "333") are shown to notify the jackpot. As the three effect symbols are pseudo-stopped and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, these three effect symbols are finally stopped. In this way, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed, the hit notification effect for notifying the jackpot (the jackpot game is executed) is performed by pseudo-stopping the three effect symbols in a manner indicating the jackpot and then stopping the game. Will be executed. When this hit notification effect is executed, the jackpot game is executed.

[Screen configuration of display screen 70]
FIG. 2 illustrates the screen configuration of the display screen 70 in the normal gaming state. When the game is controlled in the normal game state, the hold icon display area 71, the icon display area 72, and the effect symbol display area 73 are formed on the display screen 70, as illustrated in FIG. As described above, the effect symbol display area 73 displays the left symbol constituting the symbol row in the left column, the middle symbol constituting the symbol row in the middle row, and the right symbol constituting the symbol row in the right column. Display area.

<Hold icon display area 71>
The hold icon display area 71 is a display area in which a hold icon indicating that the first special symbol determination is held is displayed. In the game machine 1, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 21 in a situation where the special symbol determination and the variable display of the special symbol cannot be started immediately, such as during the variable display of the special symbol or the big hit game, the first special The right to judge the symbol is reserved up to a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment).

In this way, when the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved, the same number of hold icons as the number of hold icons for the first special symbol determination indicated by the first special symbol hold indicator 44 are displayed in the hold icon display area 71. Will be done. FIG. 2 illustrates a state in which two hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 71 in order to suggest that the number of holds for the first special symbol determination is “2”.

If the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 when a highly reliable reach effect such as SPSP reach, which will be described later, is being performed, not only the display area used for the reach effect is limited, but also the hold icon is held. The display of the icon may reduce the interest of the reach production. Therefore, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display objects (the pedestal of the hold icon) and the hold icon constituting the hold icon display area 71 are displayed during the normal reach and the SP reach, while the normal reach and the SP are displayed. As the reach effect develops from reach to SPSP reach, the display objects and hold icons that make up the hold icon display area 71 are deleted from the display screen 70, and after the SPSP reach is completed, the hold icon display area 71 is configured. A configuration is adopted in which the display object to be displayed and the hold icon are displayed again.

Further, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, basically, the game ball does not win a prize in the second starting port 22. Therefore, in the normal game state, basically, the right of the second special symbol determination is not reserved, and the hold icon related to the second special symbol determination is displayed on the display screen 70, or this hold icon is displayed. A display area for display is not formed.

<The icon display area 72>
The icon display area 72 is a display area for displaying the icon as a variation suggestion image suggesting that the first special symbol is variablely displayed. The icon is displayed in the icon display area 72 with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and is deleted from the icon display area 72 at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, for example. However, the deletion timing of the icon is not limited to this, and the icon may be deleted during the variable display of the first special symbol. For example, the icon may be deleted at the time of SPSP reach development or during SPSP reach, which will be described later. You may want to erase the icon.

By the way, when the game ball wins the first starting port 21 in a state where the variable display of the special symbol is not performed and the right of the special symbol determination is not reserved, the variable display of the first special symbol is started. As a result, the icon is displayed in the icon display area 72. On the other hand, when the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 and the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is completed, the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon (hold icon displayed at the position closest to the icon display area 72) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. It will be displayed as a new icon. In this way, the hold icon (here, the icon) shifted to the icon display area 72 is displayed larger than when it is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (see FIG. 2). Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 than to the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71.

When another hold icon different from the earliest hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, the hold icon display area 71 is accompanied by the shift of the earliest hold icon to the icon display area 72. In, the other hold icon shifts toward the icon display area 72. As is clear from the above description, in the gaming machine 1, the icon corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 may be displayed in the icon display area 72, and thus the following description will be given. Then, when the hold icon and the icon are not distinguished, they may be collectively referred to as "icon".

(About icon change production)
By the way, the hold icon is usually displayed as a white hold icon (default hold icon). On the other hand, when the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, an icon change effect in which the color of the hold icon changes may be performed. When this icon change effect is performed, the white hold icon changes to a hold icon in a color suggesting jackpot reliability such as blue, green, and red. The colors suggesting the jackpot reliability illustrated here are arranged in order from the one with the lowest jackpot reliability to the one with the highest jackpot reliability. Red is when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the red hold icon is "big hit", or when the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively long time although it is "missing". Easy to be selected. Green is easy to select when it is a "big hit" or when it is a "miss" but the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to a medium time. Blue is easily selected when it becomes "missing" or when it is "missing" and the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively short time. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the white hold icon is set to about 1%, the jackpot reliability of the blue hold icon is set to about 3%, and the jackpot reliability of the green hold icon is set to about 15%. It is set and the jackpot reliability of the red hold icon is set to about 45%.

Although the case where the icon change effect in which the display color changes only once is performed when the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 has been described here as an example, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described. Then, other icon change effects may be performed. That is, for example, when the white hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, the hold icon changes to a blue hold icon and then to a green hold icon. In some cases, an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the hold icon changes a plurality of times. Further, when the white hold icon shifted from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72 is displayed as the icon, an icon change effect in which the display color changes may be performed.

Further, the display color of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 changes, and then the display color changes when the hold icon shifts to the icon display area 72 and is displayed as the icon. In some cases, an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the icon changes in both the hold icon display area 71 and the icon display area 72. In addition, there may be an icon change effect in which the hold icon is displayed in a display color other than white (for example, blue) from the beginning, or an icon change effect in which the display color of the hold icon whose initial color is other than white is changed. ..

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can display the hold information indicating that the right to determine the special symbol is held on the display screen 70, and change the display mode of the hold information. .. In the following description, a hold icon or the icon whose display color is a color other than white may be referred to as a "special icon" to distinguish it from a normal hold icon or the icon whose display color is white.

[Modification example of display control of pending information]
The display control of the reserved information is not limited to the one illustrated in this embodiment, and may be as follows. That is, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the case where the display colors of the icons (holding icon and the icon) are four colors of white, blue, green, and red will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, the case where the display colors are four colors will be described. Other colors may be available, such as gold, which suggests that the jackpot reliability is even higher than red, and rainbow, which is selected only when the jackpot is "big hit."

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the icon change effect for changing the display color of the icon (holding icon or the icon) is performed will be described as an example, but the icon change effect is an effect for changing the display mode of the icon. The effect is not limited to the effect illustrated in the present embodiment, and may be an icon change effect that changes the shape and size of the icon, an icon change effect that changes the display color in addition to the shape and size of the icon, and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the icon change effect targeting the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71, the icon change effect targeting the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 can be executed. However, in another embodiment, a configuration in which only the former icon change effect can be executed may be adopted without providing the icon display area 72 (without displaying the icon).

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where a hold icon as hold information is displayed on the display screen 70 and the display color of the hold icon is changed will be described as an example. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, four color LEDs whose emission colors can be changed are provided, and the same number of LEDs as the number of pending numbers of the first special symbol determination are turned on, and the emission color of any of the LEDs is set. By changing it, the display mode of the reserved information may be changed.

[Flow of production accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol]
FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of various effects such as reach effects. When the first special symbol determination is executed in the normal game state, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination after the first special symbol is variablely displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen 70, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the scroll display of the three symbol strings in the effect symbol display area 73 is started (see FIG. 8A). ..

Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing", for example, different effect symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped on the effective line, and the symbol rows in the middle row in this non-reach mode. A non-reach effect (see FIG. 8B) that scrolls only the display may be performed. When this non-reach effect (variable effect that does not include the reach effect) is performed, the three effect symbols that show the disparity are pseudo-stopped at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the lost symbol is displayed as the first special symbol. Along with the stop display, a loss notification effect (see FIG. 8C) for actually stopping these three effect symbols is performed.

On the other hand, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "big hit", or when it is decided to perform the effect with reach (variable effect including reach effect) although it is "missing", the first special symbol During the variable display of, for example, a predetermined left symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line of the effect symbol display area 73, and then the right symbol, which is the same effect symbol as the left symbol, is moved onto the effective line. (See FIG. 8 (D)). Then, when the same left symbol and right symbol are pseudo-stopped on the effective line, reach is established (see FIG. 8 (E)). Then, when the reach is established in this way, a predetermined reach that makes the player expect that the middle symbol, which is the same effect symbol as the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol), stops on the effective line and becomes the same symbol. The production is done.

In the present embodiment, three types of reach effects, normal reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach, are prepared as reach effects that can be executed in association with the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 8).

The normal reach (see FIG. 8F) is a reach effect in which the jackpot reliability is relatively low (for example, the jackpot reliability: about 2%). When the reach is established, the normal reach is performed first, and during the normal reach, the scroll speed of the middle row symbol row, which was displayed by scrolling at high speed between the two reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol), gradually decreases. I will go.

Here, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing", and for example, the variation pattern E (see FIG. 9B) in which the variation time is 30 seconds at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is selected. If it is, the effect symbols of the reach loss eyes (for example, "434") are displayed by pseudo-stopping the middle symbols different from the reach symbols on the effective line, and the loss notification effect (figure) that stops these effect symbols. 8 (G)) is performed.

On the other hand, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", and for example, the variation pattern A (see FIG. 9 (A)) in which the variation time is 30 seconds at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is selected. If, the same medium symbol as the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line to display doublet (for example, "444") effect symbols, and the hit notification effect (FIG. 8 (FIG. 8) G)) is performed.

In addition, when a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time of the first special symbol is selected, the middle symbol, which is the same effect symbol as the reach symbol, is effective without performing the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect in the normal reach. After passing on the line, the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row increases to develop into SP reach (see FIG. 8 (H)) or SPSP reach (see FIG. 8 (I)).

Although not shown in the figure, when developing into a high-reliability reach effect such as SP reach or SPSP reach (higher jackpot reliability than normal reach), the left symbol that was pseudo-stopped is displayed while shrinking. While moving to the upper left position on the screen 70, the pseudo-stopped right symbol moves to the upper right position on the display screen 70 while shrinking, and these left and right symbols are in the moved position. The symbol row in the middle row is hidden until the end of the high-reliability reach effect (see, for example, FIGS. 11A to 11H). Then, the display object and the hold icon forming the hold icon display area 71 are also hidden (see, for example, FIGS. 11C to 11H). As a result, it is possible to perform a highly reliable reach effect in a display area wider than the effect symbol display area 73, and it is possible to improve the interest of the highly reliable reach effect.

SP reach and SPSP reach are configured as, for example, a battle production in which your character fights against an enemy character, SP reach is positioned as the first half of the battle, SPSP reach is positioned as the second half of the battle, and the first half of the battle and the second half of the battle. Then, the enemy characters that fight are common. That is, for example, if a battle production that fights against enemy character A is performed in the SP reach in the first half of the battle and then develops into SPSP reach in the latter half of the battle, a battle production that fights against enemy character A is also performed in SPSP reach. ..

When comparing these SP reach and SPSP reach, the SPSP reach (for example, jackpot reliability: about 35%) has a higher jackpot reliability than the SP reach (for example, jackpot reliability: about 15%). Compared to the case where only the SP reach is developed, the case where the SPSP reach is developed is characterized in that the hit notification effect is more easily executed.

In the game machine 1, the normal reach (see FIG. 8 (F)) evolves into the SP reach in the first half of the battle (see FIG. 8 (H)), and this SP reach gives a hit notification effect or a loss in FIG. 8 (G). Notification effects may be performed. In addition, when developing from normal reach to SPSP reach via SP reach (see FIGS. 8 (F), (H), and (I)), directly from normal reach to SPSP reach without going through SP reach. There are cases where it develops (see FIGS. 8 (F) and 8 (I)), and in these cases, a hit notification effect or a loss notification effect is performed at the end of this SPSP reach (FIG. 8 (I) and (I). See G)).

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the final stage of the SP reach exemplified in FIG. 8 (H), a continuous hit promotion effect (see FIG. 8 (N)) that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the first effect button 35. May be executed. When this continuous hit promotion effect is executed, as a result, when the loss notification effect is executed in SP reach without developing to SPSP reach (see FIGS. 8 (N) and (G)), from SP reach. There are times when it develops into SPSP reach (see FIGS. 8 (H), (N), and (I)). A series of effects including the continuous striking promotion effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reach is established so that the player is expected to establish the reach during the pre-reach effect (see FIG. 8 (D)) performed in the state where the reach by the effect symbol is not established. A fanning effect (see FIG. 8J) may be performed. When this reach establishment fanning effect is executed, a single push promotion effect (see FIG. 8 (K)) that prompts the player to press the first effect button 35 is subsequently executed, and the first effect button by the player is executed. Depending on the operation of 35, the reach establishment success effect (see FIG. 8M) or the reach establishment failure effect (see FIG. 8L) is executed.

Here, when the reach establishment success effect is executed, it directly develops into the SPSP reach without going through the normal reach or the SP reach (see FIGS. 8 (M) and 8 (I)). On the other hand, when the reach establishment failure effect is executed, the loss notification effect is executed as it is without the reach being established (see FIGS. 8 (L) and 8 (C)). A series of effects including the reach establishment fanning effect and the single push promotion effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15.

The type of reach effect and the method of developing the reach effect illustrated in FIG. 8 are merely examples, and the type of reach effect and the method of development may be other.

[Variable pattern selection table used in normal game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, a process of selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal gaming state will be described. Here, FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a variation pattern selection table used in a process of selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal gaming state.

The main ROM 82 has a jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 9A) as a variation pattern selection table to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol (here, the first special symbol) in a normal gaming state. ), The variation pattern selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 9B), and the variation pattern selection table for loss without reach (see FIG. 9C) are stored. The jackpot variation pattern selection table is a table that is referred to for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "big hit". The variation pattern selection table for reach loss is the first special symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "miss" and it is determined to perform the effect with reach (based on the reach random number). It is a table referred to for selecting the fluctuation pattern of. The variable pattern selection table for loss without reach is the first when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "loss" and it is determined to perform the effect without reach (based on the reach random number). It is a table referred to for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol.

(Variable pattern selection table for jackpot)
In the jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 9A), the variation pattern of the first special symbol is associated with the random number value to be compared with the variation pattern random number. In FIG. 9, for convenience of explanation, in addition to the fluctuation pattern and the number of random numbers associated with each fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and each fluctuation pattern are selected by the sub CPU 91. The type of the variable effect pattern, the specific effect content of the variable effect pattern (and some of the advance notice effect patterns), the range in which the variable pattern random number can be taken, and the ratio at which each variable pattern is selected are also described. ..

When the main CPU 81 determines to execute the jackpot game based on the jackpot random number acquired in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 21 in the normal game state, the variation acquired together with the jackpot random number. The variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected by reading the variation pattern to which the same random number value as the pattern random number is associated from the jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 9A).

As illustrated in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the range in which the variation pattern random number for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol can be taken is set to "0" to "99" in the present embodiment. It is set. In the jackpot variation pattern selection table, as illustrated in FIG. 9A, two random numbers are associated with the variation pattern A, and 15 random values are associated with the variation pattern B. 22 random values are associated with the variation pattern C, 26 random values are associated with the variation pattern D, and 35 random values are associated with the variation pattern E. There is.

Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern A is selected at a rate of 2% (= 2/100 × 100), and 15% (= 15/100 × 100). The fluctuation pattern B is selected by the ratio, the fluctuation pattern C is selected by the ratio of 22% (= 22/100 × 100), the fluctuation pattern D is selected by the ratio of 26% (= 26/100 × 100), and 35 The variation pattern E is selected at a rate of% (= 35/100 × 100). Then, for example, when the variation pattern A is selected, the variation effect pattern A is selected by the sub CPU 91, and the variation effect for performing the hit notification effect in the normal reach is performed. Further, for example, when the variation pattern C is selected, the variation effect pattern C is selected by the sub CPU 91, and the reach establishment success effect (see FIG. 8 (M)) is followed by the reach establishment fanning effect (see FIG. 8 (J)). (See) is executed, and after that, a variable effect of performing a hit notification effect is performed in the directly developed SPSP reach. Further, for example, when the variation pattern D is selected, the variation effect pattern E is selected by the sub CPU 91, and the variation effect for performing the hit notification effect is performed by the SPSP reach developed from the normal reach via the SP reach. become.

(Variable pattern selection table for reach loss)
When the main CPU 81 determines in the first special symbol determination that the jackpot game is not executed, whether or not to perform the effect with reach based on the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number. To determine. Specifically, which variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern group in which the reach effect is performed (see FIG. 9B), or the variation in which the reach effect is not performed (the reachless effect is performed). It is determined whether to select one of the fluctuation patterns from the pattern group (see FIG. 9C). Here, when it is decided to perform the effect with reach, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected with reference to the variation pattern selection table for reach loss.

In the variation pattern selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 9B), the variation pattern of the first special symbol is associated with the random number value to be compared with the variation pattern random number. In the normal game state, the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is not executed based on the jackpot random number acquired in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 21, and the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number. When it is decided to perform the effect with reach based on the above, the variation pattern to which the same random number value as the variation pattern random number acquired together with these random numbers is associated is the variation pattern selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 9B). ) To select the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

In the variation pattern selection table for reach loss, as illustrated in FIG. 9B, 30 random values are associated with the variation pattern F, and 25 random values are associated with the variation pattern G. 20 random values are associated with the variation pattern H, 15 random values are associated with the variation pattern I, and 10 random values are associated with the variation pattern J. There is.

Therefore, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "missing" and it is decided to perform the effect with reach, the fluctuation pattern F is selected at a rate of 30% (= 30/100 x 100), and 25 The variation pattern G is selected at a rate of% (= 25/100 × 100), the variation pattern H is selected at a rate of 20% (= 20/100 × 100), and 15% (= 15/100 × 100). The fluctuation pattern I is selected by the ratio, and the fluctuation pattern J is selected by the ratio of 10% (= 10/100 × 100). Then, for example, when the variation pattern G is selected, the variation effect pattern G is selected by the sub CPU 91, and the variation effect for performing the loss notification effect is performed by the SP reach developed from the normal reach. Further, for example, when the variation pattern H is selected, the variation effect pattern H is selected by the sub CPU 91, and the reach establishment success effect (see FIG. 8 (M)) is followed by the reach establishment fanning effect (see FIG. 8 (J)). (See) is executed, and after that, a variable effect that performs a loss notification effect is performed in the directly developed SPSP reach. Further, for example, when the variation pattern J is selected, the variation effect pattern J is selected by the sub CPU 91, and the variation effect for performing the loss notification effect is performed by the SPSP reach developed from the normal reach via the SP reach. become.

(Variable pattern selection table for loss without reach)
When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is not executed based on the jackpot random number and decides to perform the reachless effect based on the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, the variable pattern selection table for loss without reach is displayed. Refer to it and select the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

In the variation pattern selection table for loss without reach (see FIG. 9C), the variation pattern of the special symbol and the number of pending first special symbol determinations when the variation display of the first special symbol is started this time are displayed. It is associated.

When the number of pending first special symbol determinations becomes "0" or "1" with the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the main CPU 81 has a variation time of the first special symbol of 13 seconds. Select a variation pattern K or variation pattern L. Here, as to which of the fluctuation pattern K and the fluctuation pattern L is selected, for example, the random number value associated with each of these fluctuation patterns is stored in the main ROM 82, and the acquired reach random number is which fluctuation. It is possible to determine which variation pattern to select based on whether it matches the random number value associated with the pattern. When the number of pending first special symbol determinations is "2", the variation pattern M in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 8 seconds is selected. Further, the main CPU 81 determines the first special symbol with the start of the variation display of the first special symbol this time, because the number of pending first special symbol determinations becomes "4", which is the upper limit during the variation display of the first special symbol. When the number of holdings is "3", the fluctuation pattern N in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 4 seconds is selected.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined not to execute the jackpot game and it is determined to perform the non-reach effect, it is the number of reserved rights for the first special symbol determination. If the number of holdings is relatively large, the holding time of the first special symbol having a relatively short fluctuation time can be newly accumulated so that the holding of the first special symbol determination can be newly accumulated according to the new winning of the game ball for the first starting port 21. The variation pattern is selected. On the other hand, if the number of reserved symbols is relatively small, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is suppressed in order to prevent the first special symbol and the effect symbol from fluctuating and the progress of the game from stopping. Is selected.

For example, when the variation pattern L is selected, the variation effect pattern L is selected by the sub CPU 91, and the reach establishment failure effect (see FIG. 8 (L)) is followed by the reach establishment fanning effect (see FIG. 8 (J)). (See) is executed, and thereafter, a variable effect of performing a loss notification effect (see FIG. 8C) without establishing a reach is performed.

The following can be said from the description of the two fluctuation pattern selection tables illustrated in FIGS. 9A and 9B. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", it tends to be easy to select a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time, and conversely, it is difficult to select a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (FIG. 9). See (A)). Further, when the judgment result of the first special symbol determination is "missing" and the reach effect is performed, it is difficult to select the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, and conversely, it is easy to select the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time. There is a tendency (see FIG. 9B).

From these facts, it can be said that the longer the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is, the easier it is to execute the hit notification effect, and conversely, the shorter the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is, the easier it is to execute the loss notification effect. In other words, when the reach effect is performed over a relatively long time, such as developing from the normal reach to the SPSP reach via the SP reach, the hit notification effect is likely to be executed, and the reach is such that only the normal reach is performed. When the time required for the production is relatively short, it can be said that the loss notification effect is likely to be executed. That is, the winning is not notified by the normal reach production, but it develops from the normal reach to the SP reach or the SPSP reach, or from the normal reach via the SP reach (or directly without the SP reach). It can be said that the jackpot reliability is higher when it develops into.

[Preliminary judgment processing]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved, whether or not to execute the jackpot game before the first special symbol determination is performed for the right. Judgment Pre-judgment processing may be performed. Specifically, the main CPU 81 acquires a jackpot random number according to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 21, and based on the acquired jackpot random number, the first is performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. 1 Whether or not a jackpot determination process in the special symbol determination is performed prior to the jackpot determination process (see step S308 in FIG. 31), and when the first special symbol determination is executed, a “big hit” is determined. Is determined in advance. Further, based on the fluctuation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, the same processing as the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (see step S309 in FIG. 31) is performed based on FIGS. 9 (A) and 9 (B). 1 It is determined in advance which fluctuation pattern will be selected when the special symbol determination is executed.

In this way, when the main CPU 81 performs the pre-determination process in response to the suspension of the right to determine the first special symbol, the main CPU 81 sends a hold command including the pre-determination information indicating the pre-determination result to the sub-control board 90. Send. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the above-mentioned icon change effect based on the prior determination information included in the hold command. Then, when it is decided to execute the icon change effect, it is determined in what change pattern the display mode (the color of the icon in the present embodiment) of the icon (holding icon or the icon) is changed, and the decision result is obtained. The image / sound control board 100 is made to execute the icon change effect based on the above.

[Specific example of the effect executed in the normal game state]
Next, a specific example of the effect in the normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIGS. 10 and 11 are screen views illustrating the effect in the normal game state. Here, as the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal game state, the hit notification effect is performed in the SPSP reach developed from the normal reach. The effect executed when the fluctuation pattern D (see FIG. 9A) is selected will be described. Further, here, there is a possibility that the jackpot game may be executed prior to the hit notification effect (or the loss notification effect) being executed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state (that is, the loss notification effect). , There is a possibility that the hit notification effect will be executed) As the advance notice effect (different from the reach effect), there are four types of advance notice effects: the first notice, the second notice, the third notice, and the fourth notice. Will be described as an example when is executed.

In FIG. 10A, on the display screen 70, one hold icon (for example, a red hold icon) is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is displayed. In order to notify that the judgment result of the corresponding first special symbol determination is "missing", as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the effect symbol showing the disparity of "526" is displayed. The state in which the stop is displayed is illustrated. In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is held. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (here, the red hold icon) is executed. Then, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" and the variation pattern D is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the following effect is performed.

That is, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon, the earliest displayed in the hold icon display area 71. The hold icon of is shifted to the icon display area 72, and the scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (see FIGS. 10A and 10B). The first notice may be executed when a predetermined time elapses after the scroll display of the three symbol strings is started (see FIG. 10C). For example, as the first notice, the display mode of the effect image (first notice effect image) related to the step-up notice displayed in the central area of the display screen 70 is changed stepwise, and the effect sound related to the step-up notice is produced. The step-up notice output from the speaker 38 is executed.

Following the first notice above, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed (see FIG. 10 (D)). Here, the pseudo continuous effect means that the effect symbol displayed in the effect symbol display area 73 is varied and displayed a plurality of times during the variable display of one special symbol (here, the first special symbol). It is a pretending production. Regarding this pseudo continuous effect, the following effect display is performed.

That is, the scroll speed of the symbol row in the left column is reduced and the left symbol (for example, 6 symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and then the scroll speed of the symbol row in the right column is reduced (the left symbol that is pseudo-stopped earlier). The right symbol (for example, 4 symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and then the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row is reduced, and 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol that notifies the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (FIG. 10). (D)).

In this way, when seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row after the effect symbols that are different from each other as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-second variation effect following the pseudo-first variation effect is started. .. Specifically, after the character "x2" suggesting the start of the pseudo-second variation effect is displayed large in the central area of the display screen 70, the character "x2" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 70. It is displayed smaller in the side area, and accordingly, the scroll display of the three symbol strings is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIGS. 10 (D) and 10 (E)).

When this pseudo-second variation effect is being performed, for example, a dialogue notice is executed as the second notice. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 10 (F), an effect image (second notice effect image) showing how a predetermined character emits a line is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, and the line is displayed. The effect sound (for example, the voice of the character) related to the advance notice is output from the speaker 38.

As described above, when the dialogue notice is executed as the second notice during the change effect of the pseudo second series, the second pseudo continuous effect is executed during the change display of the first special symbol this time (FIG. 10). (G)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 10 (G), the scroll speed of the symbol row in the left column is reduced, the left symbol (for example, two symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and then the symbol row in the right column is displayed. The scroll speed is reduced and the right symbol (for example, 5 symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and then the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row is reduced and 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol.

When the second pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the variation display of the first special symbol, the pseudo-third consecutive variation effect following the pseudo-second variation effect is started. Specifically, after the character "x3" suggesting the start of the pseudo-third series of variation effects is displayed large in the central area of the display screen 70, the character "x3" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 70. It is displayed smaller in one area, and accordingly, the scroll display of the three symbol strings is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIGS. 10 (G) and 10 (H)).

Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the pseudo-third consecutive variation effect is started in this way, the scroll speed of the symbol row in the left column decreases, the left symbol (for example, three symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and then. , The scroll speed of the symbol row in the right column decreases (same as the symbol on the left), the right symbol (3 symbols in this case) is pseudo-stopped, and reach is established (see FIG. 10 (I)).

Here, the case where the "pre-reach pseudo-ream" that restarts the scroll display of each symbol string is executed before the reach is established has been described as an example, but the "reach" that restarts the scroll display of each symbol string after the reach is established has been described. In some cases, "post-pseudo-ream" is executed.

As described above, when the same effect symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped and the reach is established, the normal reach is executed (see FIG. 11 (A)). Specifically, after the reach is established, the scroll speed of the middle row symbol row gradually decreases, and the same middle symbol (here, the middle 3 symbols) as the reach symbol (here, the left 3 symbols and the right 3 symbols) reaches. An effect display is performed to show how the effective line is approached as defined by the symbol.

Here, when developing from normal reach to SPSP reach, the following effect display is performed. That is, when the scroll display of the symbol row in the middle row is performed, the same middle symbol (3 symbols in this case) as the reach symbol passes on the effective line, and the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row is accompanied by this. Will rise, making it difficult to identify the middle symbol, and a development effect will be performed that suggests that it will develop into SPSP reach (see FIG. 11 (B)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 11B, in the process of moving to the upper left area of the display screen 70 while the three symbols on the left are reduced, one rotation is made clockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction. After that, it moves to the upper left area, and at the same time, in the process of moving to the upper right area of the display screen 70 while the three symbols on the right are reduced, it makes one clockwise rotation with the scroll direction as the axial direction, and then the upper right. Move to one area. After that, until the end of the variation display of the first special symbol this time, the left three symbols are pseudo-stop displayed in the upper left area, and the right three symbols are pseudo-stop displayed in the upper right area (FIGS. 11 (C) to 11 (C) to (H)).

Next, when the development effect (see FIG. 11 (B)) suggesting the development to SPSP reach is performed as described above, the player notices that the above-mentioned third notice (see FIG. 11 (D)) occurs. (See FIG. 11 (C)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 11C, a reach pattern (here) is used for a black background image until a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the development effect is performed. Then, the effect display is performed in which only the left 3 symbols and the right 3 symbols) and the icon are superimposed and displayed, and the other effect images are hidden.

Following this darkening effect, for example, a group notice may be given as a third notice (see FIG. 11 (D)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 11D, an effect display showing how a large number of characters move from right to left on the display screen 70 is performed.

It should be noted that such a third notice is not always executed when the darkening effect is performed, and the SPSP reach is started after the third notice is executed following the darkening effect, and the darkening effect is followed. There are cases where SPSP reach is started without executing the third notice, and the former case has higher jackpot reliability than the latter case.

In this way, when the SPSP reach is started, the SPSP reach effect image, which is an effect image related to the SPSP reach, is displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 11 (E)). As a result, for example, an effect display showing how the own character and the enemy character develop an offense and defense is performed. Then, when the end of the SPSP reach is approached, a first effect button operation promotion effect is performed that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 35 (see FIG. 11 (F)). Specifically, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 35 and an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the effective period in which the operation of the first effect button 35 is effective are displayed.

In this first effect button operation promotion effect, the fourth notice is given at the timing when the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period or at the timing when the valid period ends without operating the first effect button 35. For example, a cut-in is performed in which a predetermined cut-in image is superimposed and displayed on the effect image (other than the reach symbol) displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 11 (G)). This cut-in is an effect that suggests the degree of jackpot reliability, and there are cases where a green cut-in that superimposes a green cut-in image is performed and a red that superimposes a red cut-in image. There are cases where cut-in is performed and cases where gold cut-in is performed by superimposing a golden cut-in image.If these cut-ins are arranged in order from the one with the lowest jackpot reliability to the one with the highest reliability, the green cut-in, The order is red cut-in and gold cut-in.

When the cut-in is generated in this way and the end of the SPSP reach is reached, the second effect button operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the second effect button 36 is performed (see FIG. 11 (H)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 11 (H), during the valid period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, the second effect button image imitating the second effect button 36 and "press!" A character indicating the operation content of the second effect button 36 and a valid period gauge indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed.

When the second effect button 36 is operated during the valid period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, the three effect symbols showing doublets are pseudo-stopped and then the main stop is performed as an operation-corresponding effect according to the operation. A hit notification effect is performed (see FIG. 11 (I)).

Here, since the variation pattern D (see FIG. 9A) is selected at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol this time, the hit notification effect is performed as the operation corresponding effect. When any of the fluctuation patterns H to J exemplified in FIG. 9 (B) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, three effect symbols showing reach loss eyes are simulated as the operation corresponding effect. A loss notification effect is performed to stop the vehicle and then stop it.

[About the production performed during the jackpot game]
As described above, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "big hit", any of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 (see FIG. 6B) is displayed as the first special symbol. The stop display is displayed on the vessel 41. Along with this, three effect symbols indicating doublets, such as "222", are stopped on the display screen 70. Here, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the doublet of "777" and the doublet of "333" deterministically notify that the game is controlled in the probabilistic game state after the jackpot game is completed. It is considered as an effect symbol, and for a part of the case where 3R probability variation A is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination (when the jackpot symbol X1 is stopped and displayed), three probabilistic jackpots are notified. As an effect symbol, one of these doublets will be stopped on the display screen 70.

In this way, when the three production symbols showing doublets of "777" or "333" that deterministically notify the probability variation jackpot as the jackpot symbol X1 is stopped and displayed are stopped, FIG. 6 (B). ) As described above, a jackpot game including a long-open round game in which the second doublet 28 and the V doublet 287 are long-opened is executed. Therefore, during this long open round game, a launch promotion effect (see FIGS. 12B and 12C) that urges the player to launch a game ball aimed at the V winning opening 287 is executed as the effect during the round. When the game ball passes through the V winning opening 287 during this long open round game, the launch promotion effect ends, and the V winning notification effect (see FIG. 12 (D)) that notifies that the game ball has won the V prize is displayed. Will be executed.

On the other hand, when 3R probability variation A is selected and 3R normal (see FIG. 6B) is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, "777" and "777" and " Excluding the doublet of "333", any of the seven types of doublet of "111", "222", "444", "555", "666", "888", and "999" is displayed on the display screen 70. This will be stopped. Here, when the three production symbols indicating doublets of "777" or "333" are stopped, a probability variation confirmation notification effect is performed to deterministically notify that the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot during the opening period of the jackpot game. Get doublet. On the other hand, when the three effects symbols indicating any of the above seven types of doublets are stopped, for example, during the opening period of the jackpot game, an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 35 is performed. Then, depending on the operation of the first effect button 35, a success effect (an effect of notifying that it is a probabilistic jackpot) or a failure effect (an effect of notifying that it is a normal jackpot) is performed. Specifically, when the type of jackpot is 3R probability variation A, a success effect is executed according to the operation of the first effect button 35, and when the type of jackpot is 3R normal, the first effect button. The failure effect is executed according to the operation of 35.

In this way, when the above-mentioned probability change confirmation notification effect or success effect (corresponding to the operation of the first effect button 35) is executed during the opening period of the jackpot game (when the 3R probability change A is won), A three-round long-open round game including a long-open round game in which the second large winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are long-opened is executed. The three-round long-open round game is as described above based on FIG. 6B and the like. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned failure effect is executed during the opening period of the jackpot game (when the 3R is normally won), as described above based on FIG. 6B, the second big winning opening 28 is opened. The first round game with a short opening and the two long opening round games with a long opening of the first large winning opening 26 are executed.

<When V prize is notified>
FIG. 12 is a screen view showing an example of an effect when a V prize is notified during a jackpot game. As the judgment result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol X1 (see FIG. 6B) indicating the 3R probability variation A is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41. For example, three effect symbols indicating doublets of "777" may be stopped on the display screen 70. In this case, the following effects are performed during the jackpot game related to the 3R probability variation A.

First, during the opening period of the jackpot game related to the 3R probability variation A, a predetermined opening effect is executed (see FIG. 12 (A)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 12A, the characters "RUSH bonus" that informs the type of the jackpot this time are displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, and the player is hit right. The prompting "right-handed" character and a right-pointing arrow are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70. The characters of "RUSH bonus" definitely notify that the game is controlled in the probability change game state after the jackpot game is completed, and the effect of displaying the characters of "RUSH bonus" is the above-mentioned probability change confirmation. It functions as a notification effect.

Following the opening period of the jackpot game related to the 3R probability variation A in which such an opening effect is performed, the first round game, which is a long-opening round game in which the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened for a long time, Along with this, the effect during a predetermined round is executed (see FIGS. 12B and 12C). Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 12 (B) and 12 (C), three arrows pointing to the V winning opening 287 (indicated by the letter "right-handed") and "Aim at V" Along with displaying large characters on the display screen 70 in a large size, a launch promotion effect is executed in which the voice "Aim for V" is output from the speaker 38. In addition, the three effect symbols of "777", which were stopped before the start of the jackpot game this time, are displayed small in the upper left area of the display screen 70.

In this way, in the first round game in which the launch promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to launch the game ball aiming at the V winning opening 287, the second large winning opening 28 is opened for a long time and the second large winning opening 28 is opened. When 1.5 seconds have passed from the start of opening the winning opening 28, the long opening of the V winning opening 287 is started. Then, the long opening of the V winning opening 287 is continued until the tenth game ball wins the second large winning opening 28 or the opening time of the V winning opening 287 reaches 10 seconds. Therefore, the player can easily make the V winning opening 287 win the game ball as long as he / she strikes right according to the launch promotion effect. In this embodiment, the case where the launch promotion effect is started with the start of the first round game will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, it is from the middle of the opening period or during the opening period. The launch promotion effect may be started from the start.

Next, when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 287 during the first round game, a predetermined V winning notification effect for notifying that the game ball has won a V is executed (see FIG. 12 (D)). .. Specifically, for example, an effect display showing how two characters lift a star-shaped emblem including the letter "V" and rejoice is performed, and a predetermined V winning notification sound is output from the speaker 38. ..

In this way, when the V-winning notification effect for notifying that the game ball has won the V-win during the first round round game is executed, the predetermined interval period is reached, and the following second round round game (first large prize) is executed. During the long-open round game of the mouth 26), the star-shaped emblem is displayed small in the lower left area of the display screen 70 (see FIG. 12E). Although not shown in FIG. 12, in the third round game, the same effect as during the second round game is performed. Then, when the ending period of the jackpot game following the third round game is reached, the production in the production mode named "Fierce Fighting RUSH" that definitely notifies that the game is in the "probability change game state" will be started. In order to notify, the characters "Fierce fight RUSH rush!" Are displayed large in the central area of the display screen 70, and the voice of "Fierce fight RUSH rush!" Is output from the speaker 38.

[About the production after the reach establishment fanning production]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15, the effects after the reach establishment fanning effect (an example of the first effect) will be described. Here, FIG. 13 is a screen view illustrating the reach establishment fanning effect and the reach establishment success effect (an example of the second effect). FIG. 14 is a screen view illustrating the reach establishment fanning effect and the reach establishment failure effect. FIG. 15 is a time chart illustrating the flow of the effect when the reach establishment fanning effect is executed.

As described above based on FIG. 8, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pre-reach effect (see FIG. 8D) is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. At that time, a reach establishment fanning effect (see FIG. 8J) that causes the player to expect the reach establishment may be executed. When this reach establishment fanning effect is executed, a single push promotion effect (see FIG. 8 (K)) is executed following the reach establishment fanning effect (prompting the player to press the first effect button 35 once). As an operation-corresponding effect corresponding to the single press of the first effect button 35 performed for this single press promotion effect, a reach establishment success effect (see FIG. 8 (M)) or a reach establishment failure effect (FIG. 8 (L)). See) is executed. That is, in response to the operation (single press) of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the single push promotion effect, the reach establishment success effect is executed without executing the reach establishment failure effect, and the reach establishment success effect is executed. There are cases where the reach establishment failure effect is executed without the success effect being executed.

<Specific examples of reach establishment fanning production and reach establishment success production>
Here, first, with reference to FIG. 13, a specific example of a series of effects in the case where the effects proceed in the order of the reach establishment fanning effect, the single push promotion effect, and the reach establishment success effect will be described. In FIG. 13A, the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 with two hold icons (for example, a red hold icon and a white hold icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 71. In order to notify that the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to is "missing", the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and the production symbol showing the variation of "157" is displayed. Is illustrated as a state in which is displayed as stopped. In this way, when a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is held. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (here, the red hold icon) is executed. Then, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" and the variation pattern C (see FIG. 9A) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, or when the first special symbol determination is performed. When the determination result is "missing" and the fluctuation pattern H (see FIG. 9B) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the following effects may be performed.

That is, when the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon (here, the red hold icon) is executed and the variation pattern C (or variation pattern H) is selected, this first special symbol determination is performed. As the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of, the red hold icon shifts from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72, and the three symbol rows are scrolled. The display is started (see FIGS. 13A and 13B). Note that FIG. 13B exemplifies a state immediately after the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 changes from two to one with the start of the symbol change corresponding to the red hold icon. Has been done.

In this way, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation corresponding to the red hold icon, the reach establishment fanning effect (see FIG. 8 (J)) is started (see FIG. 13 (C)). In this embodiment, the reach establishment fanning effect is composed of a character dialogue effect (see FIG. 13 (C)) and a reach symbol appearance effect following the character dialogue effect (see FIG. 13 (D)).

In the character dialogue production, as illustrated in FIG. 13C, a production image showing a state in which a predetermined character appears on the display screen 70 and the character emits a dialogue "A big chance when reach is established !?" Is displayed on the display screen 70, and along with this, the voice having the same content as the above-mentioned dialogue is output from the speaker 35. It should be noted that this character dialogue effect is an effect performed before the effect symbol that can be the reach symbol is visually displayed, and in the present embodiment, the scroll display of the three symbol rows is continued. (See FIG. 13 (C)).

In the reach symbol appearance effect, as illustrated in FIG. 13 (D), one effect symbol (here, three symbols on the left) constituting the symbol string in the left column and one one constituting the symbol string in the right column. An effect display is performed to show how the effect symbols (here, the three symbols on the right) and the effect symbols (here, the three symbols on the right) are slowly descending at the same time. In this way, when the two effect symbols common to the reach symbol appearance effect are lowered to a predetermined position, the single push promotion effect is started (see FIG. 13 (E)). This single-press promotion effect is executed during the valid period when the operation on the first effect button 35 is valid. In this single-press promotion effect, the first effect button image imitating the first effect button 35 and the first effect button The characters "Press!" Indicates the content of the operation to be performed on the 35, and the valid period gauge indicating the remaining time of the valid period in which the operation of the first effect button 35 is valid is displayed.

When the player operates the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to such a single push promotion effect, the valid period ends and the reach establishment success effect (see FIG. 8M) is executed (FIG. 13). See (F)). This reach establishment success effect is an effect of notifying that the reach has been established successfully, and in the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 13 (F), the two have descended to a predetermined position. The effect symbols (here, the left 3 symbols and the right 3 symbols) are further lowered to the effective line to be pseudo-stopped on the effective line, and a linear image extending across these effect symbols is displayed. , It is configured as a production that displays a production image showing how the character that appeared in the character dialogue production emits the dialogue "I did it !!".

It should be noted that this reach establishment success effect is effective related to the single push promotion effect at the timing when the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the single push promotion effect, or without the operation of the first effect button 35. It is executed when the period ends.

When the reach establishment success effect is executed in this way, the development effect and the darkening effect are executed in the same manner as described above based on FIGS. 11 (B) and 11 (C) (see FIGS. 13 (G) and 13 (H)). ), It will directly develop into SPSP reach without going through normal reach or SP reach (see FIG. 13 (I)). 13 (G) to 13 (I) exemplify the direct development from the development effect to the SPSP reach via the darkening effect, as illustrated in FIGS. 11 (B) to 11 (E). , There is also a production pattern that directly develops from development production to SPSP reach via darkening production and group notice.

Since the production after the development of SPSP reach is as described above based on FIGS. 11 (E) to 11 (I), detailed description here will be omitted. Here, referring to FIG. 13, during the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the red hold icon, a series of these series in the order of reach establishment fanning effect, single push promotion effect, reach establishment success effect, and SPSP reach. The case where the effect progresses has been described as an example, but the case where these series of effects proceed during the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the white hold icon which is the default hold icon, and the case where the special icon other than red is supported. A series of these effects may proceed during the variable display of the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where the reach establishment fanning effect is composed of the character dialogue effect and the reach symbol appearance effect exemplified in FIGS. 13 (C) and 13 (D) will be described as an example, but the reach establishment is achieved by the player. If you can expect it, the reach establishment fanning effect may be another effect. For example, instead of executing the character dialogue effect, the reach symbol appearance effect may be executed as the reach establishment fanning effect.

<Specific examples of reach establishment fanning production and reach establishment failure production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a specific example of a series of effects in the case where the effects proceed in the order of the reach establishment fanning effect, the single push promotion effect, and the reach establishment failure effect will be described. When the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed in the normal gaming state is "missing" and the variation pattern L (see FIG. 9C) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. When the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the variable pattern L, the following effect is performed.

When the first special symbol is variablely displayed in the variable pattern L, the reach is established, which is composed of the character dialogue effect and the reach symbol appearance effect, as described above based on FIGS. 13 (C) and 13 (D). The effect is executed (see FIGS. 14A and 14B). In FIG. 14A, one hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, and three corresponding icons (here, the white icon) displayed in the icon display area 72 are displayed. An example shows that the same character dialogue effect as in FIG. 13C is performed while the symbol sequence is scrolled. Further, in FIG. 14B, one effect symbol (here, four symbols on the left) constituting the symbol row in the left column and one effect symbol (here, four symbols on the right) constituting the symbol row in the right column are shown. A state in which the same reach symbol appearance effect as described above is performed based on FIG. 13 (D), which represents a state in which the symbols) and the symbols slowly descend at the same time, is illustrated.

When the two effect symbols common to each other are lowered to a predetermined position by such a reach symbol appearance effect, a single push promotion effect similar to the single push promotion effect illustrated in FIG. 13 (E) is started (FIG. 14 (C). )reference). When the player operates the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the single push promotion effect, the reach establishment failure effect (see FIGS. 8 (L)) is executed (see FIGS. 14 (D) to (G)). ). This reach establishment failure effect is an effect of notifying that the reach has failed to be established. In the reach establishment failure effect in the present embodiment, first, the left symbol (here, the left 4 symbols) of the two effect symbols (here, the left 4 symbols and the right 4 symbols) that have descended to the predetermined position is effective. Although it further descends to the line and makes a pseudo stop on the effective line, a slip effect occurs in which the right symbol (here, the right 4 symbols) passes over the effective line, and the scroll display of the symbol row in the right column is restarted. (See FIG. 14 (D)). Then, the right symbol (here, the right 5 symbols) representing a number "1" larger than the left symbol that is pseudo-stopped on the effective line descends, and the right symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line. The effect display is performed (see FIGS. 14 (E) and 14 (F)). At that time, an effect display showing how the character appearing in the character dialogue effect (see FIG. 14 (A)) emits a line such as "Sorry ..." is also executed.

In this way, when the left symbol and the right symbol representing a number "1" larger than the left symbol are pseudo-stopped on the effective line, the effect display showing how the middle symbol representing the same number as the right symbol descends is displayed. It is done (see FIG. 14 (G)). Then, at the end of the first special symbol this time, the left symbol, the middle symbol representing a number "1" larger than the left symbol, and the right symbol representing a number "1" larger than the left symbol are pseudo-stopped, and the first symbol is stopped. As the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, the lost notification effect of stopping these three effect symbols is executed (see FIGS. 8 (C) and 14 (H) to (I)).

It should be noted that the above-mentioned reach establishment failure effect relates to the timing when the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the single press promotion effect, or the single press promotion effect without the operation of the first effect button 35. It is executed when the validity period ends.

Up to this point, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, a specific example of a series of effects when the reach establishment success effect (or reach establishment failure effect) is executed after the reach establishment fanning effect (and the single push promotion effect). However, the reach establishment fanning effect is an effect that can be an opportunity to execute the SPSP reach, which is a highly reliable reach effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the jackpot by executing the reach establishment fanning effect.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following configurations are adopted in relation to the display of icons (holding icons and the icons). That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reach effect may or may not be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the white or blue icon. On the other hand, the reach effect is always executed during the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the green or red icon having higher jackpot reliability. Then, as described above, when the reach establishment success effect is executed after the reach establishment fanning effect, the SPSP reach is directly developed without going through the normal reach or the SP reach.

Since the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment adopts such a configuration, for example, by executing the reach establishment fanning effect while the green icon (or the red icon) is displayed, the game machine 1 has such a configuration. At that point, the player can be made aware that the SPSP reach will be developed, and the player's expectation for the jackpot can be effectively improved from an earlier stage than the successful reach establishment effect is executed. It is possible. In addition, even when the reach establishment fanning effect is executed while the white icon (or the blue icon) is displayed, the icon may be displayed because it may directly develop into SPSP reach after that. It is possible to make a player who did not expect a big hit based on the color feel unexpected, and as a result, it is possible to obtain a high effect.

<Reproduction control of the production sound when the reach establishment fanning production is executed>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 15, the reproduction control of the effect sound when the reach establishment fanning effect is executed will be described. Here, FIG. 15 is a time chart illustrating the flow of the effect when the reach establishment fanning effect is executed, and FIG. 15A is a case where the reach establishment failure effect is executed after the reach establishment fanning effect. 15 (B) illustrates the flow of the effect when the reach establishment success effect is executed after the reach establishment fanning effect.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, with the start of the variation display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, the sub CPU 91 performs the variation effect in the variation effect pattern set in the process of step S163 (see FIG. 43). A variable effect start command for instructing the execution of the advance notice effect pattern in the advance notice effect pattern set in the start and the process of step S164 (see FIG. 43) is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120). On the other hand, the image / sound control CPU 101 of the image / sound control board 100 instructs the VDP 104 to execute a process of displaying the image data stored in the CGROM 105 on the image display device 7 based on the received variation effect start command. At the same time, the acoustic DSP 107 is instructed to execute the process of outputting the acoustic data stored in the acoustic ROM 108 from the speaker 38. As a result, the variable effect (and the advance notice effect) in the effect pattern set by the sub CPU 91 is realized by using the image display device 7, the speaker 38, and the like.

(When the reach establishment failure effect is executed)
As described above, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed in the variable pattern L (see FIG. 9 (C)) in the normal game state, the reach establishment fanning effect (see FIG. 8 (J)) and the single push promotion The effect may proceed in the order of the effect (see FIG. 8 (K)), the reach establishment failure effect (see FIG. 8 (L)), and the loss notification effect (see FIG. 8 (C)). Specific examples of these series of effects are as described above based on FIG. During the variable display of the first special symbol in which these series of effects are performed, the following effect sounds are reproduced using the speaker 38.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 15 (A), after the variation display of the first special symbol in the variation pattern L is started, the character dialogue effect constituting the reach establishment fanning effect (see FIG. 14 (A)). Is started, a predetermined variable effect sound is played. Then, during the execution period of the character dialogue effect and the reach symbol appearance effect (see FIG. 14B) as the reach establishment fanning effect on the display screen 70, a predetermined fanning effect that raises the player's expectation for the reach establishment. The dedicated song is played (see FIG. 15 (A)). This song dedicated to the fanning effect is a song dedicated to the reach-establishing fanning effect that is played only during the execution period of the reach-established fanning effect. It ends with the start of the valid period, and during this valid period, there is a silent period in which the production sound is not reproduced.

In this way, after raising the player's expectation for the establishment of the reach by the character dialogue production, the reach pattern appearance production, and the reproduction of the song dedicated to the fanning production, the player shifts to the above-mentioned silent period. It is possible to concentrate on the operation of the first effect button 35 while expecting the reach to be established.

The valid period (and silent period) related to the single-press promotion effect is set in advance at the timing when the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period or without the first effect button 35 being operated during the valid period. It will end when the time from the start to the end of the valid period has elapsed. As the valid period related to the single push promotion effect ends, the reach establishment failure effect (see FIGS. 14 (D) to 14 (G)) is performed on the display screen 70. During the execution period of the reach establishment failure effect, a predetermined failure effect dedicated song that effectively notifies that the reach establishment has failed is played (see FIG. 15A). Then, as the loss notification effect following the reach establishment failure effect is started, the reproduction of the failure effect dedicated song ends and the reproduction of the predetermined variable effect sound is started.

Here, the song dedicated to the failure effect is a song dedicated to the reach establishment failure effect that is played only during the execution period of the reach establishment failure effect, and the reproduction of the failure effect dedicated song is a single push promotion effect (see FIG. 14C). ) Will start with the end of the valid period, and will end with the start of the loss notification effect.

(When the reach establishment success production is executed)
As described above, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed in the fluctuation pattern C (see FIG. 9A) or the fluctuation pattern H (see FIG. 9B) in the normal gaming state, the reach establishment fanning effect is produced. (See FIG. 8 (J)), single push promotion effect (see FIG. 8 (K)), reach establishment success effect (see FIG. 8 (M)), SPSP reach (see FIG. 8 (I)). May progress. Specific examples of these series of effects are as described above based on FIG. During the variable display of the first special symbol in which these series of effects are performed, the following effect sounds are reproduced using the speaker 38.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 15B, after the variation display of the first special symbol in the variation pattern C (or variation pattern H) is started, the character dialogue effect (FIG.) constituting the reach establishment fanning effect. Until 13 (C) is started), a predetermined variable effect sound is reproduced. Then, during the execution period of the character dialogue effect and the reach symbol appearance effect (see FIG. 13 (D)) as the reach establishment fanning effect on the display screen 70, the same as described above based on FIG. 15 (A). , A predetermined song dedicated to the fanning effect is played (see FIG. 15B). The playback of the song dedicated to the fanning effect ends with the start of the valid period related to the single push promotion effect (see FIG. 13 (E)), and during this valid period, there is a silent period in which the production sound is not reproduced. Become.

The flow of the effect and the reproduction control of the effect sound until the end of the effective period related to the single push promotion effect are the same as those described above based on FIG. 15 (A), but the variation pattern C (or the variation pattern). When H) is selected, the reach establishment success effect (see FIG. 13 (F)) is performed on the display screen 70 as the valid period related to the single push promotion effect ends. During the execution period of the reach establishment success effect, a predetermined song dedicated to the success effect that effectively notifies that the reach has been established is successfully played (see FIG. 15B). Then, during the period in which the development effect (and the darkening effect) is executed following the reach establishment success effect, there is a silent period as in the effective period of the single push promotion effect. After that, when the SPSP reach is developed, the playback of the SPSP dedicated song is started (see FIG. 15 (B)).

Here, the song dedicated to the success production is a song dedicated to the success production of reach that is played only during the execution period of the success production of reach establishment, and the song dedicated to the success production is reproduced by the single push promotion production (see FIG. 13 (E)). ), And ends with the start of the development effect (see FIG. 15 (B)).

(About acoustic data)
The acoustic ROM 108 (see FIG. 5) contains SPSP direct development acoustic data and failed acoustic data as acoustic data for reproducing dedicated songs corresponding to each of the reach establishment fanning effect, the reach establishment success effect, and the reach establishment failure effect. The data and are stored. Here, the SPSP direct development acoustic data is acoustic data for reproducing a fanning production dedicated song and a success producing dedicated song, and in the present embodiment, it is configured to have a fanning part and a success part. (See FIGS. 15 (A) and 15 (B)). On the other hand, the failed acoustic data is acoustic data for reproducing a song dedicated to the failure effect, and is configured to have a failure part in the present embodiment (see FIG. 15 (A)).

As illustrated in FIG. 15B, when the reach establishment success effect is executed after the reach establishment fanning effect, the acoustic DSP 107 sounds the SPSP direct development acoustic data based on the instruction from the image acoustic control CPU 101. The data is read from the ROM 108 to the SDRAM 109 and the data processing is executed. Then, during the execution period of the reach establishment fanning effect, the fanning part of the SPSP direct development acoustic data after the data processing is output to the speaker 38 via the (amplifier 110). Then, during the execution period of the single push promotion effect, the output of the SPSP direct development acoustic data after the data processing is interrupted, and with the start of the reach establishment success effect, the success part of the SPSP direct development acoustic data after the data processing is started. The output of SPSP direct development acoustic data is resumed from. As a result, during the execution period of the reach establishment success production, the fanning part is output to play the song dedicated to the fanning production, and during the execution period of the reach establishment success production, the success part is output to be dedicated to the success production. The song is played (see FIG. 15B).

On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 15A, when the reach establishment failure effect is executed after the reach establishment fanning effect, the acoustic DSP 107 is based on the instruction from the image acoustic control CPU 101, and the SPSP direct development acoustic data. And the failed acoustic data is read from the acoustic ROM 108 to the SDRAM 109 and data processing is executed. Then, during the execution period of the reach establishment fanning effect, the fanning part of the SPSP direct development acoustic data after the data processing is output to the speaker 38 via the (amplifier 110), and with the start of the single push promotion effect, SPSP Direct development Ends the output of acoustic data. After that, with the start of the reach establishment failure effect, the output of the failed acoustic data after the data processing is started. As a result, during the execution period of the reach establishment failure effect, the song dedicated to the fanning effect is played by outputting the fanning part of the SPSP direct development acoustic data, and the failure sound data is output during the execution period of the reach establishment failure effect. By doing so, the song dedicated to the failure production is played (see FIG. 15 (A)).

(About the tune)
It should be noted that the song dedicated to the fanning effect played during the execution of the reach establishment fanning effect is configured as the first song-like production song that raises the player's expectation for the reach establishment (FIGS. 15A and 15B). )reference). On the other hand, the success production dedicated song played during the execution of the reach establishment success production, which can be performed after the reach establishment fanning production, effectively notifies the reach establishment, and is different from the first tune. It is configured as a song-like production song (see FIG. 15 (B)).

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reproduction of the song dedicated to the fanning effect and the reproduction of the song dedicated to the success effect are realized by one acoustic data called the SPSP direct development acoustic data (see FIG. 15B). .. Therefore, the SPSP direct development acoustic data is configured as acoustic data for the fanning part to reproduce the production song of the first musical tone, and the successful part is the acoustic data for reproducing the production song of the second musical tone. It is configured as. That is, in the SPSP direct development acoustic data, when the fanning part and the success part are continuously output, the tune of the directed song being played changes in the middle at the output start timing of the success part.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reproduction of the song dedicated to the failure effect is realized by the failure sound data (see FIG. 15 (A)), and the failure sound data is different from the first song tone and is different from the first song tone. It is configured as acoustic data for reproducing a production song having a third song tone, which is different from the second song tone.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the tune of the song dedicated to the fanning production, the tune of the song dedicated to the success production, and the tune of the song dedicated to the failure production are different from each other. Therefore, when the reach establishment success production (or reach establishment failure production) is executed after the reach production fanning production, the reach establishment success production and the reach establishment failure production are based on the tone of the production song output from the speaker 38. It is possible to easily determine which effect is being executed, and the reach establishment success effect (or reach establishment failure effect) performed on the display screen 70 and the effect song output from the speaker 38. It is possible to obtain a high effect by the synergistic effect of.

(About the gaming machine 1 that can execute the reach establishment fanning effect and the reach establishment success effect)
Up to this point, the effects such as the reach establishment fanning effect, the reach establishment success effect, and the reach establishment failure effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment have been described, but such a gaming machine 1 is the following gaming machine. Can be understood as.

With a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 31 described later: see FIG. 5). ,
When the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed, the special game execution means for executing the special game (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the large winning opening opening / closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 28)
A production control means for controlling the production (for example, sub CPU 91: see FIG. 5) is provided.
The effect control means
Based on the result of the determination (for example, the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state), the first effect (for example, the reach establishment fanning effect: FIGS. 13 (C) to (D), FIG. 14 (A)). ~ (B), see FIG. 15) and a second effect that can be performed after the first effect (for example, a successful reach establishment effect: see FIGS. 13 (F) and 15).
During the execution of the first effect and the execution of the second effect, a predetermined effect song that is not output when these effects are not executed (for example, a song dedicated to the fanning effect illustrated in FIG. 15B). A song dedicated to success production) is played,
The effect control means
The production is such that the production song of the first musical tone is played during the execution of the first production, and the production song of the second musical tone different from the first musical tone is played during the execution of the second production. A gaming machine characterized in that it controls the reproduction of a song (see FIG. 15B).

According to this gaming machine, during the execution of the first effect and the execution of the second effect, a predetermined effect song that is not output when these effects are not executed is played, and the first effect is being executed and the first effect is being executed. 2 The production songs having different musical tones (for example, the fanning production dedicated song and the success production dedicated song) are played during the execution of the production (see, for example, FIG. 15B). Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the first effect or the second effect is being executed based on the effect song being reproduced, and the player can easily recognize that the effect song is being reproduced. Based on the tone of the song, it is possible to easily determine which of the first and second effects is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the problem that the player does not notice the transition from the first effect to the second effect, and the execution of the first effect and the second effect and the execution of the second effect. It is possible to obtain a high production effect by the synergistic effect with the reproduction of the production song.

(Other configurations related to reach establishment fanning production, reach establishment success production, reach establishment failure production)
The following configurations may be adopted for the reach establishment fanning effect, the reach establishment success effect, and the reach establishment failure effect.

That is, in the present embodiment, the player is urged to press the first effect button 35 once during the period from the end of the reach establishment fanning effect to the start of the reach establishment success effect (or reach establishment failure effect). A configuration is adopted in which a single push promotion effect is executed, and a reach establishment success effect (or a reach establishment failure effect) is executed in response to a single press of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the single push promotion effect. ing. On the other hand, in another embodiment, instead of the single-press promotion effect that urges the player to press the first effect button 35, for example, a continuous-stroke promotion effect that urges the player to repeatedly hit the first effect button 35 is performed. A configuration is adopted in which the reach establishment success effect (or reach establishment failure effect) is executed on condition that the number of operations of the first effect button 35 reaches a predetermined number of times during the valid period related to the continuous hit promotion effect. You may. Further, for example, a long-press promotion effect for urging the player to press and hold the first effect button 35 is executed, and the operation time of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the long-press promotion effect has reached a predetermined time. On the condition that the reach is established successfully (or the reach is not established), a configuration may be adopted.

Further, the operation means operated by the player in response to the single push promotion effect (see FIG. 15) in the present embodiment and the continuous hit promotion effect in the other embodiment is not limited to the first effect button 35, but the second effect. It may be the button 36. That is, following the reach establishment fanning effect, a single push promotion effect (or a continuous hit promotion effect) that prompts the player to perform a single press (or continuous hit) of the second effect button 36 is executed, and a single push promotion effect (or a continuous hit promotion effect) is executed. ), The reach establishment success effect (or reach establishment failure effect) may be executed in response to a single press of the second effect button 36 (or an intermittent predetermined number of operations: repeated hits).

In addition, following the reach establishment fanning effect, the first single-press promotion effect that urges the player to press the first effect button 35, and the second single-press that urges the player to press the second effect button 36. A push promotion effect is executed, and a reach establishment success effect (or a reach establishment success effect) is performed in response to a single press of the first effect button 35 (or the second effect button 36) during the valid period of one of these two single push promotion effects. It is also possible to adopt a configuration such as executing a reach establishment failure effect).

When adopting a configuration in which one of these two single push promotion effects is executed following the reach establishment fanning effect, for example, when the second single push promotion effect is executed, it is better. It is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the reach establishment success effect is easily executed (that is, it is easy to directly develop into SPSP reach) as compared with the case where the first single push promotion effect is executed.

Further, for example, when the reach establishment success effect is executed after the reach establishment fanning effect (that is, when it directly develops into SPSP reach), the first single push promotion effect is executed and the second single push promotion effect is executed. On the other hand, when the push promotion effect is executed and the reach establishment failure effect is executed after the reach establishment fanning effect, the first single push promotion effect is always executed and the second single push promotion effect is executed. It is also conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the production is never executed.

When such a configuration is adopted, when the second single push promotion effect is executed following the reach establishment fanning effect, the reach establishment failure effect is executed in response to the single press of the first effect button 35. There is no such thing, and the successful reach establishment production will always be executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that when the second single push promotion effect is started, the reach establishment success effect is executed later (that is, it directly develops into SPSP reach), and the game It is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation that the jackpot game is executed even before the person performs the operation, and gives the player a strong motivation for operating the second effect button 36. It is possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the reach establishment success effect is executed, a configuration is adopted in which the SPSP reach is directly developed without going through the normal reach or the SP reach. For this reason, a part of the SPSP-dedicated song is successfully produced instead of the playback control (see FIG. 15B) in which the success-directed song different from the SPSP-dedicated song is played along with the execution of the reach establishment success effect. Other playback controls such as playing as a dedicated song may be executed. When adopting a configuration such as executing such another playback control, for example, the playback of the SPSP-dedicated song is started when the reach establishment success effect is started, and the SPSP-dedicated song is started when the reach establishment success effect is completed. It is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which playback is interrupted and then playback of the SPSP-dedicated song is resumed with the start of SPSP reach.

Further, in the present embodiment, the valid period (see FIGS. 15A and 15B) related to the single push promotion effect, the execution period of the development effect (see FIG. 15B), and the execution period of the darkening effect (see FIG. 15B). Although the case of (see FIG. 15B) is described as an example in which the silent period is formed, the directing sound reproduction period in which the directing sound is reproduced may be set with respect to at least one of these three periods. However, if the valid period related to the single push promotion effect is the production sound reproduction period, the song tone is different from the song dedicated to the fanning effect, the song tone is different from the song dedicated to the successful production, and the song is dedicated to the failure production. It is preferable to reproduce a production sound having a different tone from that of the song. Further, when the execution period of the development effect is set as the effect sound reproduction period, it is preferable to reproduce the effect sound having a different tone from the song dedicated to the success effect, and when the execution period of the darkening effect is set as the effect sound reproduction period. Preferably reproduces a production sound having a tune different from that of the SPSP dedicated song.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fanning part and the success part of the SPSP direct development acoustic data illustrated in FIG. 15 are continuously reproduced, the SPSP direct development is performed so that the musical tone changes with the start of the success part. Acoustic data is configured. Then, the SPSP direct development acoustic data is configured so that the reproduction time required to reproduce the fanning part from the beginning to the end and the time from the start to the end of the reach establishment fanning effect match. On the other hand, in other embodiments, the playback time required to reproduce the fanning part from the beginning to the end is made longer than the time from the start to the end of the reach establishment fanning effect, and the reach establishment fanning effect is produced. Along with the end of, music control may be performed such that the reproduction of the fanning part is interrupted in the middle of the fanning part. By performing this kind of music control, the player feels that the song dedicated to the fanning production is not played up to the sharp part and is interrupted in the middle (that is, the melody of the first song is interrupted in the middle). As a result, it is possible to more effectively notify the start of the single push promotion effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 15A, the reproduction of the song dedicated to the fanning effect and the reproduction of the song dedicated to the failure effect are two acoustic data, the SPSP direct development acoustic data and the failed acoustic data. In the other embodiment, one acoustic data having a fanning part and a failure part illustrated in FIG. 15A is prepared. , This one acoustic data may be used to realize the reproduction of the song dedicated to the fanning effect and the reproduction of the song dedicated to the failure effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reproduction of the fanning production-only song (an example of the "first song-like production song") and the reproduction of the success production-only song (an example of the "second music-like production song") are performed. The case where it is realized by using one acoustic data called SPSP direct development acoustic data will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, the acoustic data for reproducing the song dedicated to the fanning effect and the song dedicated to the successful effect are reproduced. The acoustic data for this purpose may be prepared separately, and these acoustic data may be individually output from the speaker 38.

Further, in the present embodiment, following the reach establishment fanning effect, the single push promotion effect as the operation promotion effect is executed, and the operation corresponding effect according to the operation by the player (single press of the first effect button 35) is performed. The case of executing the reach establishment success effect (or the reach establishment failure effect) will be described as an example. On the other hand, in other embodiments, the operation promotion effect is not executed after the reach establishment fanning effect, but the reach establishment success effect (or regardless of the operation by the player) is followed by the reach establishment fanning effect. A configuration such as executing a reach establishment failure effect) may be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the reach establishment success effect is executed, the case where the SPSP reach is started after executing the development effect and the darkening effect will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, these two A configuration may be adopted in which the SPSP reach is started without executing either one or both of the effects. That is, the SPSP reach may be executed so as to follow the successful reach establishment effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the "first effect" is the reach establishment fanning effect and the "second effect" is the reach establishment success effect will be described as an example, but the "first effect" and the "second effect" will be described. Is not limited to these effects, and is, for example, a case where a stage effect that can be changed stepwise up to a predetermined number (for example, "4") up to any stage of a predetermined number or less can be executed. In addition, the first stage effect is executed as the "first effect" and the second stage effect is executed as the "second effect", and the second stage effect is executed as the "first effect". It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the production of the third stage is executed as the "second production".

Up to this point, the configurations that can be adopted in other embodiments and the like have been described in order in relation to the reach establishment fanning effect, the reach establishment success effect, the reach establishment failure effect, and the like. It goes without saying that it is possible.

[Notice during SP reach and notice during SP SP reach]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the SP reach (see FIG. 8 (H)), a battle effect in which the own character fights against an enemy character (hereinafter, also referred to as “first half battle effect”) is executed, and the first half of the battle effect. Different effects are executed according to the result of the battle effect. Specifically, if the character finally defeats the enemy character in the first half battle production, the hit notification production (see FIG. 8 (G)) is executed at the end of the SP reach, and the final battle production in the first half. If your character is defeated by an enemy character, a loss notification effect (see FIG. 8 (G)) is executed at the end of SP reach.

In addition, in the first half battle production, a pinch production (see, for example, FIG. 16A) indicating that the character is about to be defeated by the enemy character is executed, and then the player is urged to repeatedly hit the first production button 35. The continuous striking promotion effect (see FIGS. 8 (N) and 16 (C)) may occur. When this continuous striking promotion effect occurs, the rescue failure effect (see FIG. 16 (F)) indicating that the rescue of the own character fails is performed as an operation-responsive effect corresponding to the player's continuous striking of the first effect button 35. , A rescue success effect (see FIG. 16 (E)) showing how the character is successfully rescued will be executed. Here, when the rescue failure effect is executed, the loss notification effect is executed at the end of the SP reach without developing into the SPSP reach (see FIGS. 8 (N) and 8 (G)). On the other hand, when the rescue success effect is executed, the SP reach is evolved into the SPSP reach, and the hit notification effect (or the loss notification effect) is executed in the SPSP reach (FIG. 8 (I) and the loss notification effect). (G)).

In this way, if the rescue success effect is executed and the SP reach is evolved from the SP reach, the own character revived by the rescue will fight again with the same enemy character that appeared during the SP reach during the SPSP reach. A battle production (hereinafter, also referred to as "second half battle production") is executed. Then, when the own character finally defeats the enemy character in the second half battle production, a hit notification production (see FIG. 8 (G)) is executed at the end of the SPSP reach (see FIG. 19), and the second half battle production is also performed. If the player's character is finally defeated by the enemy character in, the loss notification effect (see FIG. 8 (G)) is executed at the end of the SPSP reach.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a notice effect (notice during SP reach) using the first suggestion image (for example, see FIG. 16 (E)) is executed during the execution of the first half battle effect in the SP reach. , This SP reach notice suggests that a jackpot game may be executed, and informs whether or not it will develop into SPSP reach. Further, during the execution of the latter half battle effect in the SPSP reach, the advance notice effect (SPSP reach) using the above first suggestion image and the second suggestion image (for example, the weapon possessed by the character: see FIG. 19B). (Medium notice) is executed, and it is suggested that the jackpot game may be executed by this SPSP reach notice.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, a specific example of the advance notice during SP reach when the SPSP reach does not develop will be described. Here, FIG. 16 is a screen view showing a specific example of the SP reach notice during the SP reach when the loss notification effect is executed, and FIG. 17 is a first suggestion image displayed during the SP reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating.

<Notice during SP reach when it does not develop into SPSP reach>
For example, the determination result of the first special symbol determination executed by the main CPU 81 in the normal gaming state is "missing", and the variation pattern G (see FIG. 9B) is used as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. When selected, a series of effects illustrated in FIG. 16 may be executed when the first special symbol is variedly displayed in the variation pattern G.

In FIG. 16A, the reach by four symbols is shown during the variation display of the first special symbol in the variation pattern G corresponding to the icon (for example, the red icon) displayed in the icon display area 72. It is illustrated that the first half battle production is being executed during the SP reach in the state where is established. In the first half battle production, after the production display showing how the own character and the enemy character repeat the offense and defense is performed, the own character attacks the enemy character (for example, a monster) as illustrated in FIG. 16 (A). In some cases, a pinch effect is performed to show how the character is about to be defeated. FIG. 16 (A) shows that the own character, which has been attacked by the enemy character, is about to fall down by dropping his weapon (here, a sword).

When such a pinch effect is performed, an explanatory effect is performed prior to the continuous striking effect described later (see FIG. 16B). This explanation production is a production that explains that if a friend succeeds in rescuing his character, it will be a big chance of a big hit. Specifically, "Save energy and rescue! A big chance with the appearance of friends! A message such as "?" Is displayed on the display screen 70, and a voice having the same content as this message is output from the speaker 38.

When the above-mentioned explanatory effect is performed, the operation of the first effect button 35 becomes an effective valid period, and during this valid period, a continuous striking promotion effect for urging the player to repeatedly hit the first effect button 35 is performed. FIG. 16C exemplifies a state immediately after the continuous striking promotion effect is started, and the display screen 70 shows a first effect imitating the first effect button 35 as an effect image related to the continuous striking promotion effect. The button image, the character "continuous hit!" Showing the operation content for the first effect button 35, and the valid period gauge showing the remaining time of the valid period related to the continuous hit promotion effect are displayed.

When the number of operations of the first effect button 35 reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, "2") during the valid period related to such a continuous striking promotion effect, the white color worn by this companion is not included. A first suggestion image showing the aura (first suggestion image of the initial display mode: see FIG. 17 (A)) is displayed in the center of the display screen 70 (see FIG. 16 (D)). The first suggestion image has a function of suggesting that a jackpot game may be executed and notifying whether or not it develops into SPSP reach. The first suggestion image is an effect image whose display mode can change in response to repeated hits of the first effect button 35, but the change in the display mode of the first suggestion image will be described in detail later based on FIG. Describe.

As described above, when the fluctuation pattern G (see FIG. 9B) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the following effect display is performed. That is, when the SP reach does not develop into the SPSP reach, the display mode of the first suggestion image is maintained according to the repeated hits of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the continuous hit promotion effect. FIG. 16 (E) exemplifies a situation immediately after the valid period related to the continuous striking promotion effect has expired and the effect image related to the continuous striking promotion effect has been erased. Even if the number of operations of the first effect button 35 increases during the valid period related to the promotion effect, the display mode of the first suggestion image does not change from the initial display mode (see FIG. 17 (A)) (FIG. 16 (D)). ~ (E)).

In this way, if the display mode of the first suggestion image is maintained in the initial display mode even after the valid period related to the continuous striking promotion effect has expired, the rescue of the own character fails and the own character completely collapses. In the end, a rescue failure effect is performed to show how the enemy character is leaving (see FIG. 16 (F)). When such a rescue failure effect is performed, at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, the three effect symbols (here, "454") indicating the reach loss eyes are pseudo-stopped, and the first special symbol is lost. As the symbols are stopped and displayed, these effect symbols are stopped as they are (see FIGS. 16 (G) and 16 (H)).

<About the display mode of the first suggested image>
As illustrated in FIG. 17, the display modes of the first suggested image include an initial display mode (see FIG. 17 (A)), a first display mode (see FIG. 17 (B)), and a second display mode. (See FIG. 17 (C)) and a third display mode (see FIG. 17 (D)). Although the case where the display mode of the first suggestion image does not change from the initial display mode is described as an example with reference to FIG. 16, the first effect button 35 is repeatedly pressed during the valid period related to the continuous stroke promotion effect. 1 The display mode of the suggested image may change from the initial display mode to another display mode.

Specifically, when the display mode of the first suggestion image changes from the initial display mode to the first display mode, or when the display mode of the first suggestion image changes from the initial display mode to the second display mode via the first display mode. In the case of changing to, the display mode of the first suggestion image may change from the initial display mode to the third display mode via the first display mode and the second display mode. Further, when the display mode of the first suggested image changes from the initial display mode to the second display mode without going through the first display mode, or when the display mode of the first suggested image changes from the initial display mode to the first display mode. It may change to the third display mode through the second display mode without any notice. Further, when the display mode of the first suggestion image changes from the initial display mode to the third display mode without going through the second display mode after passing through the first display mode, or when the display mode of the first suggestion image is initially displayed. The mode may change from the mode to the third display mode without going through the first display mode and the second display mode.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, information indicating the number of operations that defines the change timing of the display mode is stored in the sub ROM 92 for each change pattern of the display mode of the first suggested image. For example, for a change pattern that changes the display mode of the first suggested image in the order of the initial display mode, the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode, the number of first operations (for example, 5 times). , Information indicating the number of second operations (for example, 10 times) and the number of third operations (for example, 15 times) is stored in the sub ROM 92. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 is based on the operation information (operation signal) output from the first effect button detection sensor 96 (see FIG. 5), and the sub CPU 91 of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the continuous striking promotion effect. The number of operations is counted, and when the counted number of operations reaches the first number of operations, the display mode of the first suggested image is changed from the initial display mode to the first display mode, and the counted number of operations becomes the second number of operations. The display mode of the first suggested image is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode at the timing when the first suggested image is reached, and the display mode of the first suggested image is displayed at the timing when the counted number of operations reaches the third display mode. The aspect is changed to the third display aspect.

On the other hand, as described above based on FIG. 16, in the case where the display mode of the first suggestion image is maintained in the initial display mode, the number of operations as described above is not stored, so that the first suggestion image is displayed. The aspect does not change.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect control (or the first) that changes the display mode of the first suggestion image based on the number of operations of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the continuous striking promotion effect. 1) The effect control for maintaining the display mode of the suggestion image as the initial display mode) is performed, but with respect to the case where the display mode of the first suggestion image is changed, the first suggestion is made every time the first effect button 35 is operated. It is also possible to perform an effect lottery for whether or not to change the display mode of the image, and perform effect control such as changing the display mode of the first suggested image on condition that the effect lottery is won.

By performing such effect control, even if the change pattern for changing the display mode of the first suggestion image is the same, the display mode of the first suggestion image is changed at different timings. There are many ways to change the display mode of the image, and it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the effect corresponding to repeated hits that changes the display mode of the first suggested image.

The change pattern of the display mode of the first suggestion image is determined by the sub CPU 91 based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination by the main CPU 81 at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol in which the advance notice during SP reach is executed. However, if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period related to the continuous striking promotion effect, the following effect control is performed.

For example, when a change pattern for changing the display mode of the first suggested image from the initial display mode to the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode is set, the sub CPU 91 relates to the continuous striking promotion effect. During the valid period, the display mode of the first suggestion image is maintained in the initial display mode because the number of operations does not even reach the first number of operations described above. Then, at the timing when the valid period ends, the display mode of the first suggestion image is changed from the initial display mode to the third display mode (without going through the first display mode and the second display mode).

In this way, when the operation is not performed during the valid period related to the continuous striking promotion effect, the display mode of the first suggested image is changed from the initial display mode to a preset change pattern at the timing when the valid period ends. It will directly change to the final display mode defined by.

(Characteristics of the first suggestion image of the initial display mode)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 17, the features of each display mode of the first suggested image will be described.
The first suggestion image of the initial display mode (see FIG. 17A) has the following features. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 16, the first suggestion image of the initial display mode does not include a fellow character who is a fellow of the own character (number of fellow characters: "0"), and is worn by the fellow of the own character. It is a production image showing only a white aura. Since the first suggestion image of this initial display mode is an effect image showing that no fellow character to rescue the own character has appeared, the initial display mode is the final display mode of the first suggestion image. Has the characteristic that it does not develop into SPSP reach.

In addition, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first half battle production during SP reach develops into the second half battle production during SPSP reach, the own character fights against the enemy character as a notice during SPSP reach in the second half battle production. Weapon strengthening effect (see FIGS. 18 (H) to (I) and 19 (A) to (B)) is performed to strengthen the weapon (an example of the second suggestion image) using the first suggestion image. When the initial display mode is the final display mode of the first suggestion image, the weapon strengthening effect is not performed because the SPSP reach is not developed as described above (FIG. 17 (A)). reference).

(Characteristics of the first suggestion image of the first display mode)
The first suggestion image of the first display mode (see FIG. 17B) has the following features.
That is, the first suggestion image of the first display mode includes one fellow character who is a fellow of the own character (number of fellow characters: "1"), and the one fellow character wears a blue aura. It is a production image showing the situation. Since the first suggestion image of this first display mode is an effect image showing that one fellow character who rescues the own character has appeared, the first display mode is the final display mode of the first suggestion image. In that case, there is a characteristic that SP reach is always developed to SPSP reach, that is, from the first half battle production to the second half battle production.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if even one fellow character appears in response to the operation of the first production button 35 during the valid period related to the continuous striking promotion production, it will surely develop into SPSP reach (second half battle production). It is configured so that it will not develop into SPSP reach even though fellow characters have appeared. Therefore, when the display mode of the first suggestion image changes from the initial display mode to the first display mode, the development to SPSP reach becomes rich (see FIG. 17 (B)). This also applies to the case where the first suggestion image of the second display mode (see FIG. 17 (C)) and the first suggestion image of the third display mode (see FIG. 17 (D)) are displayed. The effect of displaying the first suggestion image of any of the first display modes to the third display mode functions as a definite notification effect that deterministically notifies the development to SPSP reach (second half battle effect). It can be said that it is a production.

Returning to the explanation of the first suggestion image of the first display mode in FIG. 17B, if the second half battle effect is developed with the first suggestion image displayed, the weapon for the own character to fight the enemy character is used. , Weapon strengthening effect to strengthen using the first suggestion image is performed, but the first suggestion image being displayed is the first suggestion image of the first display mode (one fellow character wearing a blue aura) In the case of a production image (), the degree of weapon strengthening is small. Specifically, when the weapon strengthening effect using the first suggestion image of the first display mode is performed, the first suggestion image of the first display mode is shown in FIGS. 18 (H) to 18 (I). In the same way, move to the white sword (see FIG. 16 (A)) (which was owned by the character during the first half battle production), and as shown in FIG. 19 (A). The first suggestion image injects energy into the white sword, and the white sword is transformed into a middle sword that has the same blue color as the first suggestion image of the first display mode and is larger than the sword. The production is performed (see FIG. 17 (B)).

(Characteristics of the first suggestion image of the second display mode)
The first suggestion image of the second display mode (see FIG. 17C) has the following features.
That is, the first suggestion image of the second display mode includes two fellow characters who are friends of the own character (number of fellow characters: "2"), and the two fellow characters wear a green aura. It is a production image showing the situation. Since the first suggestion image of this second display mode is an effect image showing that two fellow characters who rescue the own character have appeared, the second display mode is the final display mode of the first suggestion image. In that case, it will surely develop from the first half battle production to the second half battle production. That is, when the first suggestion image of the second display mode is displayed, the development to SPSP reach (second half battle production) becomes rich.

In addition, if the first suggestion image is displayed and it develops into the second half battle production, a weapon strengthening production is performed to strengthen the weapon for the own character to fight the enemy character by using the first suggestion image. If the first suggestion image being displayed is the first suggestion image of the second display mode (a production image showing how two fellow characters are wearing a green aura), the degree of weapon strengthening is moderate. It has the characteristic of being. Specifically, when the weapon strengthening effect using the first suggestion image of the second display mode is performed, the first suggestion image of the second display mode is shown in FIGS. 18 (H) to 18 (I). In the same way, move to the white sword (see FIG. 16 (A)) (which was owned by the character during the first half battle production), and as shown in FIG. 19 (A). The first suggestion image injects energy into the white sword, and the white sword changes to a large sword that is the same green color as the first suggestion image of the second display mode and is larger than the sword or the middle sword. A weapon strengthening effect is performed (see FIG. 17 (C)).

(Characteristics of the first suggestion image of the third display mode)
The first suggestion image of the third display mode (see FIG. 17 (D)) has the following features.
That is, the first suggestion image of the third display mode includes three fellow characters who are friends of the own character (number of fellow characters: "3"), and the three fellow characters wear a red aura. It is a production image showing the situation. Since the first suggestion image of this third display mode is an effect image showing that three fellow characters who rescue the own character have appeared, the third display mode is the final display mode of the first suggestion image. In that case, it will surely develop from the first half battle production to the second half battle production. That is, when the first suggestion image of the third display mode is displayed, the development to SPSP reach (second half battle production) becomes rich.

In addition, as described above, if the first suggestion image is displayed and the second half battle effect is developed, the weapon for the own character to fight the enemy character is strengthened by using the first suggestion image. However, if the first suggestion image being displayed is the first suggestion image of the third display mode (a production image showing how three fellow characters are wearing a red aura), the weapon is strengthened. It is characterized by a large degree of. Specifically, when the weapon strengthening effect using the first suggestion image of the third display mode is performed, the first suggestion image of the third display mode is possessed by the own character even during the first half battle effect. ) Move to the white sword (see Figures 18 (H)-(I)), the first suggestion image injects energy into the white sword (see Figure 19 (A)), and the white sword , A weapon strengthening effect is performed that changes to a ray gun that has the same red color as the first suggestion image of the third display mode and has a higher attack power than a small sword, a medium sword, and a large sword (FIG. 17 (C)). , See FIGS. 19 (A)-(B).

(Comparison of initial display mode, first display mode to third display mode)
Up to this point, as described with reference to FIG. 17, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the display mode of the first suggestion image does not change from the initial display mode, it does not develop into SPSP reach and the first suggestion image. When the final display mode of is any one of the first display mode to the third display mode, it always develops into SPSP reach. Then, while the first suggestion image of the initial display mode does not show the fellow character, the first suggestion image of the first display mode to the third display mode shows at least one fellow character. Therefore, the player can easily recognize whether or not the SPSP reach develops based on whether or not the fellow character is represented by the final first suggestion image.

Regarding the display color of the first suggestion image of each display mode, the aura shown by the first suggestion image of the initial display mode suggesting non-development of SPSP reach is white, whereas the first of the first display modes is white. The aura shown by the suggestion image is blue, the aura shown by the first suggestion image of the second display mode is green, and the aura shown by the first suggestion image of the first display mode is red (see FIG. 17). Of these first suggestion images, when the first suggestion image of any of the first display modes to the third display modes is displayed, it always develops into SPSP reach thereafter. The effect of displaying the suggestion image functions as a notice effect suggesting that the jackpot game may be executed and the possibility is relatively high. Therefore, the player can easily determine whether or not the jackpot game may be executed based on whether or not the display color of the first suggestion image is white.

Further, the initial display mode and the first display mode to the third display mode have the following features. That is, with respect to the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol for which the advance notice during SP reach is executed is "big hit", the final display mode of the first suggestion image. Are arranged in order from the one with the highest selection ratio to the one with the lowest selection ratio, in the order of the third display mode, the second display mode, the first display mode, and the initial display mode. Further, in the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol for which the advance notice during SP reach is executed is "missing", the final display mode of the first suggestion image. Are arranged in order from the one with the highest selection ratio to the one with the lowest selection ratio, in the order of the initial display mode, the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode.

Therefore, the display mode of the first suggestion image finally changes to the third display mode. The jackpot reliability of the advance notice during SP reach is the highest, and the display mode of the first suggestion image finally changes to the second display mode. The jackpot reliability of the SP reach notice is the next highest, and the display mode of the first suggestion image finally changes to the first display mode. The jackpot reliability of the SP reach notice is the next highest, and the display mode of the first suggestion image is the next highest. The display mode does not change from the initial display mode. The jackpot reliability of the notice during SP reach is the lowest, and the player has the jackpot reliability (based on the number of fellow characters and the color of the aura shown in the first suggestion image. That is, it is possible to easily recognize how much there is a possibility that the hit notification effect is executed and the jackpot game is executed).

(About weapons after weapon strengthening production)
The jackpot reliability of the first suggestion image of the first display mode to the third display mode is as described above, but the following can be said about the second suggestion image showing the weapon after the weapon strengthening effect. That is, when the weapon strengthening effect is executed using the first suggestion image of the first display mode, the second suggestion image representing the middle sword expressed in blue, which is common to the aura shown by the first suggestion image, is displayed. Will be done. In addition, when the weapon strengthening effect is executed using the first suggestion image of the second display mode, the second suggestion image representing the large sword expressed in green common to the aura shown by this second suggestion image is displayed. Will be done. In addition, when the weapon strengthening effect is executed using the first suggestion image of the third display mode, the second suggestion image representing the ray gun expressed in red, which is common to the aura shown by the third suggestion image, is displayed. Will be done. As described above, the second suggestion image representing the blue middle sword corresponds to the first suggestion image of the first display mode, and the second suggestion image representing the green large sword corresponds to the first suggestion image of the second display mode. Since the second suggestion image representing the red ray gun corresponds to the first suggestion image of the third display mode, the second suggestion image representing the middle sword, the second suggestion image representing the large sword, and The magnitude relationship of the jackpot reliability with the second suggestion image representing the ray gun is the same as that of the first suggestion image of the first display mode to the third display mode described above.

That is, the jackpot reliability of the SPSP reach notice that displays the second suggestion image representing the red ray gun is the highest, and the jackpot reliability of the SPSP reach notice that the second suggestion image representing the green sword is displayed. Is the next highest, and the second suggestion image showing the blue middle sword is displayed. The jackpot reliability of the SPSP reach notice is the lowest, and the player can see the type of weapon shown by the second suggestion image and its display. Based on the color, it is possible to easily recognize how reliable the jackpot is.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the weapon strengthening effect is executed, the first suggestion image is not displayed but the second suggestion image is displayed, so that the player can perform the weapon strengthening effect until the weapon strengthening effect is executed. Can recognize the jackpot reliability based on the display mode of the first suggestion image, and recognize the jackpot reliability based on the display mode of the second suggestion image after the weapon strengthening effect is executed. Can be done.

<Notice during SP reach and notice during SPSP reach when developing to SPSP reach>
Subsequently, referring to FIGS. 18 and 19, the SP reach notice that finally changes the display mode of the first suggestion image to the third display mode, and the first suggestion image of the own character's weapon in the third display mode. A specific example of the notice during SPSP reach that changes the display color to a ray gun having the same display color will be described. Here, FIGS. 18 and 19 are screen views showing specific examples of the SP reach notice and the SPSP reach notice that are performed when the SP reach develops into the SPSP reach. Here, the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on which the SP reach notice and the SPSP reach notice are executed is "big hit", and the first special Fluctuation pattern E (see FIG. 9A) is selected as the variation pattern of the symbol, and as the variation pattern of the first suggestion image, the display mode of the first suggestion image is changed from the initial display mode to the first display mode and the second display mode. , The case where the change pattern to be changed in the order of the third display mode is set will be described as an example.

Since the effects performed before the start of the continuous hit promotion effect in the first half battle effect are the same as the above-mentioned effects based on FIGS. 16 (A) and 16 (B), the continuous hit promotion effect is started here. I will explain the production after that.

FIG. 18 (A) exemplifies a state immediately after the continuous hit promotion effect is started during the first half battle effect, as described above based on FIG. 16 (C), with the reach established by the seven symbols. Has been done. In this way, after the continuous striking promotion effect for prompting the player to repeatedly hit the first effect button 35 is started, when the number of operations of the first effect button 35 reaches "2" during the valid period related to the continuous striking promotion effect, FIG. As described above based on 16 (D), the first suggestion image (see FIG. 17 (A)) of the initial display mode is displayed in the center of the display screen 70 (see FIG. 18 (B)).

After that, when the number of operations of the first effect button 35 reaches the first number of operations (for example, 5 times) during the valid period related to the continuous striking promotion effect, the first suggestion image of the initial display mode becomes the first suggestion image of the first display mode. It changes to a suggestion image (see FIGS. 18B and 18C). Then, when the first effect button 35 is further operated and the number of operations of the first effect button 35 reaches the second number of operations (for example, 10 times) during the valid period, the first display mode is the first. When the suggestion image changes to the first suggestion image of the second display mode and the number of operations of the first effect button 35 reaches the third number of operations (for example, 15 times) during the valid period, the second display mode The first suggestion image of is changed to the first suggestion image of the third display mode (see FIG. 18D).

In FIG. 18, the first suggestion image of the first display mode is exemplified in FIG. 18 (C), and the first suggestion image of the third display mode is exemplified in FIG. 18 (D). The illustration of the first suggestion image of the second display mode displayed between the above is omitted.

As illustrated in FIG. 18D, when the valid period related to the continuous striking promotion effect ends after the first suggestion image of the third display mode is displayed, the display of the effect image related to the continuous striking promotion effect ends. , A rescue success effect is performed to show how the own character is revived with the help of the three fellow characters shown in the first suggestion image of the third display mode (see FIG. 18 (E)).

In addition, in FIGS. 18 (D) and 18 (E), in order to emphasize that the character has been revived, the first suggestion image of the third display mode is reduced and moved to the lower right area on the display screen 70. An example is shown in which the revived own character is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70 created by moving the first suggestion image, but the three companions represented by the first suggestion image in the third display mode. While maintaining at least one of the size of the character and the aura and the display area, the rescue success effect showing how the character is revived may be executed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 18 (E), when a predetermined time elapses after the rescue success production is started, the SP reach (first half battle production) develops into the SPSP reach (second half battle production) (FIG. 18 (E) and FIG. See (F)). FIG. 18 (F) illustrates how the resurrected own character confronts the reappearing enemy character with a sword, which has evolved into a battle production in the second half. In this way, when the second half battle production is started, the offensive and defensive production is performed to show how the own character and the enemy character repeat the offense and defense (see FIG. 18 (G)).

After that, when the offensive and defensive production is performed and the final stage of the second half battle production is approaching, the weapon strengthening production using the first suggestion image (here, the first suggestion image of the third display mode: see FIG. 17 (D)) is performed. (See FIGS. 18 (H) to (I) and FIGS. 19 (A) to (B)). Specifically, first, a movement effect display is executed in which the first suggestion image changed to the third display mode is moved toward the second suggestion image representing the sword possessed by the character (FIG. 18 (H). )-(I)).

It should be noted that FIGS. 18 (H) to 18 (I) illustrate how the first suggestion image moves toward the second suggestion image representing the sword while shrinking, but the display mode of the first suggestion image ( Here, the movement effect display for moving the first suggestion image toward the second suggestion image may be executed without changing the size). Further, here, a case where the first suggestion image changed to the third display mode is moved toward the second suggestion image will be described as an example, but the first suggestion image changed to the first display mode will be the second. The same movement effect display is executed also in the case of moving toward the suggestion image or in the case of moving the first suggestion image changed to the second display mode toward the second suggestion image.

As described above, by moving the first suggestion image (here, the first suggestion image of the third display mode) toward the second suggestion image, three fellow characters wearing a red aura are displayed. When the first suggestion image to represent reaches the second suggestion image representing the sword, an effect display showing how energy is injected into the sword from three fellow characters is executed (see FIG. 19 (A)), and then the self A change effect display is executed to show how the sword possessed by the character changes to the same red ray gun worn by the three fellow characters (see FIGS. 19A and 19B). ).

Here, a case where the change effect display is executed using the first suggestion image of the third display mode will be described as an example, but the first suggestion image of the first display mode (see FIG. 17B) will be described. When the weapon strengthening effect is executed by using it, the effect display showing how energy is injected into the sword from one fellow character wearing a blue aura is executed, and then the sword possessed by the own character is executed. However, a change effect display is executed that shows how the character changes to the same blue middle sword that one fellow character wears. In addition, when the weapon strengthening effect is executed using the first suggestion image (see FIG. 17 (C)) of the second display mode, energy is injected into the sword from two fellow characters wearing a green aura. A change effect display is executed to show how the sword possessed by the character changes to the same green large sword worn by two fellow characters. Will be done.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 19, when the sword possessed by the character changes to a red ray gun, the final attack effect showing how the character makes the final attack using the ray gun is executed (FIG. 19 (C)). reference). Here, the weapon used for the final attack has been changed to the medium sword, the large sword, and the ray gun with the highest attack power among the ray guns, and its display color is red. Therefore, based on the type of weapon possessed by the character (here, the ray gun) and its display color (here, red), the player wins the enemy character and gives a hit notification effect. It is possible to easily recognize that is relatively likely to be performed.

FIG. 19 (D) exemplifies a defeat effect showing how an attack by a self-character using a ray gun hits an enemy character and the self-character destroys the enemy character. In this way, when the defeat effect is executed, at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, after the three effect symbols indicating doublets (here, "777") are pseudo-stopped, the first special symbol is used. As the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol, a hit notification effect for stopping these three effect symbols is executed (see FIGS. 19 (E) to 19 (F)).

Here, since the variation pattern E (see FIG. 9 (A)) selected when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit" is selected, the defeat effect is produced after the final attack effect. And the hit notification effect is executed, but the variation pattern J (corresponding to the variation pattern E) selected when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing" is selected (see FIG. 9B). If this is the case, a defeat production (a production that shows how your character is defeated by an enemy character in a revenge) is executed after the final attack production, and then the three production symbols that indicate the reach loss are pseudo-stopped. A loss notification effect is executed, in which the player is stopped and then stopped.

(About game machine 1 that can execute SP reach notice and SP SP reach notice)
Up to this point, the SP reach notice and the SPSP reach notice executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment have been described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19, but such a gaming machine 1 is as follows. It can be regarded as a gaming machine.

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 31: see FIG. 5).
When the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed, the special game execution means for executing the special game (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the large winning opening opening / closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 28)
A production control means for controlling the production (for example, sub CPU 91: see FIG. 5) is provided.
The effect control means
Refer to the first suggestion image (for example, FIG. 17A) suggesting that the special game may be executed based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the determination result of the first special symbol determination). ) And the second suggestion image suggesting that the special game different from the first suggestion image may be executed (for example, a production image showing a weapon possessed by the own character: FIGS. 18 (F) to 18 (F) to (Refer to (G)) and can be displayed.
The display mode of the first suggestion image can be changed from the first display mode (for example, the initial display mode exemplified in FIG. 17 (A)) suggesting that the possibility is the first degree. A second display mode (eg, a first display mode, a second display mode, and a second display mode exemplified in FIGS. 17 (B) to 17 (D)) suggesting that the second degree is higher than the first degree. The display mode of the second suggestion image (for example, the type of weapon possessed by the own character and its display color) is changed to any of the three display modes), and then the display mode of the second suggestion image is changed to the second display mode of the first suggestion image. (For example, change to a weapon having a color common to the color of the aura represented by the first suggestion image: FIGS. 18 (H) to (I), FIGS. 19 (A) to (See (B))), a gaming machine characterized by the above.

According to this gaming machine, after the display mode of the first suggestion image is changed to the second display mode, the display mode of the second suggestion image is changed to the corresponding display mode corresponding to the second display mode (for example, 18 (B)-(D), 18 (H)-(I), 19 (A)-(B)). As described above, it is suggested that the special game may be executed by both the display effect of changing the display mode of the first suggestion image and the display effect of changing the display mode of the second suggestion image. Therefore, due to the synergistic effect of these display effects, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the special game is executed, and it is possible to obtain a high effect. Further, since it is suggested that the special game may be executed depending on the display mode after the change of the suggestion images of both the first suggestion image and the second suggestion image, the display mode of either one of the suggestion images is changed. Compared to the case, there is an advantage that the player can easily recognize that the special game may be executed.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment capable of executing the SP reach notice and the SPSP reach notice can be regarded as the following gaming machines.
It is equipped with an input means (for example, the first effect button 35) that can be input by a player.
The effect control means
Depending on the number of times of input to the input means becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of first operations: 5 times), the display mode of the first suggested image is changed to the first display mode (for example, FIG. 17A). The gaming machine is characterized in that the second display mode (for example, the first display mode exemplified in FIG. 17B) is changed from the initial display mode (exemplified in FIG. 17B).

According to this gaming machine, the display mode of the first suggestion image changes to the second display mode according to the number of times of input to the input means reaches a predetermined number of times. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player who wants to recognize how likely the special game is to be executed to input to the input means, and the input to the input means is not performed. It is possible to easily and effectively suppress the problem that a sufficient effect cannot be obtained due to the above.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment capable of executing the SP reach notice and the SPSP reach notice can be regarded as the following gaming machines.
The effect control means
Before changing the display mode of the second suggested image to the corresponding display mode (for example, before executing the change effect display illustrated in FIGS. 19A to 19B), the second display mode. A gaming machine characterized in that a movement effect display (see, for example, FIGS. 18H to 18I) for moving the first suggestion image changed to the second suggestion image is executed.

According to this gaming machine, a movement effect display in which the first suggestion image changed to the second display mode is moved toward the second suggestion image before the display mode of the second suggestion image is changed to the corresponding display mode. Is executed (see, for example, FIGS. 18 (H) to (I) and FIGS. 19 (A) to (B)). Therefore, the line of sight of the player who has visually recognized how the display mode of the first suggestion image changes from the first display mode to the second display mode can be easily guided to the second suggestion image, and the result is As a result, it is possible to effectively improve the effect of the display effect (for example, the change effect display exemplified in FIGS. 19A to 19B) that changes the display mode of the second suggestion image to the corresponding display mode. It is possible.

(Other configurations related to SP reach notice and SPSP reach notice)
The following configurations may be adopted for the SP reach notice and the SPSP reach notice.
That is, in the present embodiment, the display mode is changed before the display mode of the second suggestion image representing the weapon possessed by the own character is changed to the corresponding display mode corresponding to the display mode after the change of the first suggestion image. The case of executing the movement effect display (for example, see FIGS. 18H to 18I) for moving the first suggestion image toward the second suggestion image has been described as an example. On the other hand, in another embodiment, the display mode of the second suggestion image may be changed to the corresponding display mode without executing such a movement effect display.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the first suggestion image is initially displayed according to the number of operations of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the continuous striking promotion effect becomes the first operation number (for example, 5 times). The first suggestion image is changed according to the change from the mode to the first display mode and the number of operations of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the continuous striking promotion effect becomes the second operation number (for example, 10 times). The display mode is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, and the number of operations of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the continuous striking promotion effect becomes the third operation number (for example, 15 times). The case where the display mode of the first suggested image is changed from the second display mode to the third display mode will be described. On the other hand, in another embodiment, the continuous hitting promotion effect for prompting the player to repeatedly hit the first effect button 35 is not executed, and the player inputs the input means to the input means (in the present embodiment, the first effect button 35 Regardless of the operation), the display mode of the first suggestion image may be changed as described above based on FIG.

Further, in the present embodiment, a change effect for changing the display mode of the first suggestion image from the initial display mode to another display mode (for example, the continuous hit correspondence effect exemplified in FIGS. 18B to 18D) is performed. Although the case of executing during SP reach has been described as an example, in other embodiments, such a change effect is executed during a reach effect different from SP reach (for example, during normal reach or SPSP reach), or , May be executed when the reach effect is not performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a change effect (for example, a change effect display exemplified in FIGS. 19A to 19B) for changing the display mode of the second suggestion image to the corresponding display mode is executed during SPSP reach. However, in other embodiments, such a change effect display is executed during a reach effect different from the SPSP reach (for example, during normal reach or SP reach), or the reach effect is performed. It may be executed when it is not done.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the change effect of changing the display mode of the first suggestion image from the initial display mode to another display mode, both the display content and the display color of the display object represented by the first suggestion image are changed. Although the case has been described as an example, the change effect is not limited to this, and a change effect that changes only the display content (in this embodiment, the number of fellow characters) without changing the display color of the display object can be executed. Alternatively, a change effect that changes only the display color without changing the display content of the display object may be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the change effect for changing the display mode of the second suggestion image to the corresponding display mode, the display content of the display object (weapon possessed by the own character in the present embodiment) represented by the second suggestion image is displayed. The case where both the display color and the display color are changed has been described as an example, but the change effect is not limited to this, and only the display content (in this embodiment, the type of weapon) is changed without changing the display color of the display object. A change effect may be executed, or a change effect that changes only the display color (in the present embodiment, the color of the weapon) without changing the display content of the display object may be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first suggestion image is at least an effect image representing the aura worn by the fellow characters will be described as an example, but the display object represented by the first suggestion image is not limited to the aura, but other objects ( For example, it may be an item). Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the second suggestion image is an effect image representing a weapon will be described as an example, but the display object represented by the second suggestion image is not limited to the weapon, but may be another object (for example, a character). There may be.

[About music playback control in the high base state]
Next, the music reproduction control in the high base state will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 22. Here, FIG. 20 is a screen view illustrating a music selection screen. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the selected music in the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game state (following the probabilistic game state). FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining control related to music reproduction.

As described above based on FIG. 6B, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol X1 of the 3R probability variation A is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 in the normal gaming state, the first A jackpot game including a long-opening round game in which the two major winning openings 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened for a long time is executed. Then, when the game ball wins a V prize during this long open round game (see FIG. 7B), the period during which the probabilistic game is executed up to 100 times (an example of the "first number of times") ("first time"). The game is controlled in a probabilistic game state that can be continued for an example of "period", hereinafter also referred to as "probability change game period"). Then, when the judgment results of the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) in each of the 100 probabilistic games are all "missing", a maximum of 100 times (an example of "second number of times"). ) Is executed (an example of the "second period", hereinafter also referred to as the "time-saving game period"), the game is controlled in a time-saving game state that can be continued (see FIG. 7 (H)). ). This means that the judgment result of the second special symbol determination in the probabilistic game state (or time-saving game state) is "big hit", and the "10R probable change A" and "3R probable change" exemplified in FIG. 6 (C) as the type of big hit. The same applies to the case where "B" (a big hit in which the number of STs is 100 and the number of time reductions is 100) occurs.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, music reproduction control for reproducing a predetermined music using the speaker 38 is executed during the above-mentioned probability variation gaming period and the time-saving gaming period. Then, when the predetermined music is being played and the second special symbol (or the first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, the player performs a predetermined operation to arbitrarily change the music being played. be able to.

Although not shown in the figure, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a cross key having an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key at a position close to the first effect button 35. Is provided. Further, in addition to the first effect button detection sensor 96 and the second effect button detection sensor 97, a key operation detection sensor for detecting the operation of the cross key is connected to the sub control board 90. When the player operates any of the cross keys (up key, down key, left key, or right key), a detection signal notifying that the key operation is detected is sent from the key operation detection sensor to the sub control board 90. Is output to. At that time, different detection signals are output depending on whether the up key is operated, the down key is operated, the left key is operated, or the right key is operated. Therefore, the sub CPU 91 of the sub control board 90 can specify which of the four keys has been operated based on the detection signal from the key operation detection sensor.

This cross key can be used when making changes related to the effect performed on the gaming machine 1. For example, when a predetermined song is being played during the probabilistic gaming period (or the shortened gaming period), the cross key can be used.
The volume can be raised by one step by operating the up key, the volume can be lowered by one step by operating the down key, and the song being played can be changed during the song changeable period. By operating the left key or the right key, the music being played can be changed to another music.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can arbitrarily select the music to be played during the probabilistic game period and the time-saving game period, while the game is controlled in the normal game state, or the time-saving game. Although the period and the game state are the same, in the time-saving game state (see FIGS. 7 (D) and (E)), which shifts after the end of the jackpot game related to the 3R normal (see FIG. 6 (B)), the music to be played is played. It is configured so that the player cannot select it.

FIG. 20 (A) illustrates an effect image displayed on the display screen 70 when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol in the probabilistic game period (or time-saving game period), and FIG. 20 (B) ) Illustrates the effect image displayed on the display screen 70 during the variable display of the second special symbol during the probabilistic game period (or the time-saving game period).

Both the probabilistic game period and the time-saving game period are in a high base state in which it is easy for the game ball to win the second starting port 22. For this reason, during the probabilistic game period and the time-saving game period, in order to encourage the player to hit right toward the gate 25 and the second starting port 22, right-handed arrow consisting of a right-pointing arrow and the character "right-handed". The promotion image is displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70 (see FIGS. 20A and 20B).

Further, during the probabilistic game period and the time-saving game period, the predetermined music is played regardless of whether or not the special symbol is variablely displayed, unless a so-called customer waiting state is established. Therefore, during the probabilistic game period and the time-saving game period, the song name of the song being played and the song are sung as information indicating the song being played (hereinafter, also referred to as "music information"). The names of the singers are displayed side by side in the upper left area of the display screen 70 (see FIGS. 20A and 20B). In addition, in FIGS. 20A and 20B, as music information about the music being played, the characters "time of battle" as the music name of the music being played and the name of the singer singing this music are shown. The state in which the character "Strong Warrior X" is displayed is illustrated.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the music information indicating the music is displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70 during the playback of the music, but the music being played is changed to another music. If so, the music information will be changed at the same time. That is, for example, when the music being played is changed from the music X-1 to the music X-2, the music information related to the displayed music X-1 is scrolled in a predetermined direction from the upper left area and displayed on the display screen. The music information related to the newly appearing music X-2, which was deleted from 70, scrolled in the same direction as the music information related to the music X-1, and the music information related to the music X-1 was displayed in the upper left. The music information change display that moves to the area will be performed.

By the way, during the probabilistic game period or the time-saving game period, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 42, the display screen 70 contains three effect symbols for notifying the loss. Displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the second special symbol is in the stopped state by seeing that the effect symbol is actually stopped without looking at the second special symbol display 42. it can.

However, even though the three production symbols are displayed in the main stopped state as described above, if the above music information change display is performed, the production symbols are still in the main stopped state. , Other production images (here, music information) will fluctuate, so there is a risk that the player who sees the music information change display instead of the production symbol will mistakenly think that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. ..

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the variable display of the second special symbol (or the first special symbol) during the probabilistic game period or the time-saving game period, the left key or the right key of the cross key can be operated. Depending on the situation, the music being played is changed to another music, while the music being played is changed while the second special symbol (and the first special symbol) is stopped and displayed during the probabilistic game period or the time-saving game period. It is restricted (that is, the music being played is not changed to another music even if the left key or the right key is operated).

In this way, the player can arbitrarily change the music being played during the variable display of the second special symbol (or the first special symbol) during the probabilistic game period or the time-saving game period. Therefore, at the positions on the left and right sides of the music information displayed on the display screen 70, a left key image imitating the left key and a right key image imitating the right key are displayed in a state of high brightness, respectively ( (See FIG. 20B). Therefore, it is possible for the player who visually recognizes the left key image and the right key image to easily recognize that the music being played can be changed by operating the left key or the right key.

On the other hand, during the stop display of the second special symbol (and the first special symbol) during the probabilistic game period or the time-saving game period, the left side with low brightness is located at the left and right positions of the music information displayed on the display screen 70. A key image and a right key image are displayed (see FIG. 20 (A)). For this reason, the player invalidates the operation of the left key and the right key based on the decrease in the brightness of the left key image and the right key image, and even if the operation is performed, the music being played is changed. It is possible to easily recognize that it is not done.

<About the production mode during the probabilistic game period>
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, three production modes of effect mode A, effect mode B, and effect mode C are prepared as effect modes related to the variable effect and the advance notice effect performed during the probabilistic game period. By changing the mode, for example, the display mode of the effect symbol, the type of the advance notice effect, the type of the background image displayed on the display screen 70, and the like are changed.

On the other hand, during the ending period of the jackpot game, which is performed immediately before the start of the probabilistic game period, a mode selection promotion effect that prompts the player to select one of the effect modes A to C is executed, and the player Can arbitrarily select any of the effect modes A to C by operating the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the mode selection promotion effect. Although not shown in the figure, when this mode selection promotion effect is performed, a mode A image showing the effect mode A, a mode B image showing the effect mode B, and a mode C image showing the effect mode C Is displayed on the display screen 70, and the cursor is located on any one of these three mode images. For example, if the player operates the first effect button 35 once during the above valid period while the cursor is located on the mode A image, the cursor moves from the mode A image to the mode B image. Further, when the player operates the first effect button 35 once during the above valid period while the cursor is located on the mode C image, the cursor moves from the mode C image to the mode A image. Then, it is determined that the mode image in which the cursor is located at the timing when the valid period related to the mode selection promotion effect ends is the mode image indicating the effect mode selected by the player, and the probabilistic game shifts after the jackpot game ends. The effect mode in the period is finally set to the effect mode corresponding to the mode image in which the cursor is located.

Since the mode selection promotion effect is started with the cursor positioned on the mode A image, if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period related to the mode selection promotion effect, the mode A image is displayed. The valid period ends with the cursor positioned, and when the jackpot game ends and the probabilistic game period shifts, the variable effect is started in the effect mode A corresponding to the mode A image.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect mode is set by the player operating the first effect button 35 during the variable display of the second special symbol (or the first special symbol) during the probabilistic game period. It is possible to change to another production mode. For example, if the player operates the first effect button 35 while the variable effect of the second special symbol is being displayed during the probabilistic game period and the variable effect is being performed in the effect mode A, the next of the second special symbol is next. With the start of the variable display, the effect mode is changed from the effect mode A to the effect mode B.

In the variable effect pattern setting process (process of step S163 in FIG. 43) for setting the effect pattern of the variable effect during the probabilistic game period and the time-saving game period, the variable effect pattern selection table stored in the sub ROM 92 is referred to. In the present embodiment, as the variable effect pattern selection table, a variable effect pattern selection table for effect mode A, a variable effect pattern selection table for effect mode B, and a variable effect pattern selection table for effect mode C are stored. There is. When the effect mode is set in the probabilistic game period or the time-saving game period, the mode information indicating the effect mode being set is stored in the sub RAM 93, and the sub CPU 91 is among the above three variable effect pattern selection tables. , 1 variation effect pattern is selected with reference to the variation effect pattern selection table corresponding to the effect mode indicated by the mode information, and the information indicating the selected variation effect pattern is stored in the sub RAM 93 as the setting information of the variation effect.

Further, in the advance notice effect pattern setting process (process of step S164 in FIG. 43) for setting the effect pattern of the advance notice effect in the probabilistic game period and the time-saving game period, the advance notice effect pattern selection table stored in the sub ROM 92 is referred to. However, in the present embodiment, as the advance notice effect pattern selection table, the advance notice effect pattern selection table for the effect mode A, the advance notice effect pattern selection table for the effect mode B, and the advance notice effect pattern selection table for the effect mode C are stored. Has been done. The sub CPU 91 selects one advance notice effect pattern by referring to the advance notice effect pattern selection table corresponding to the effect mode indicated by the mode information stored in the sub RAM 93 among the above three advance notice effect pattern selection tables. , Information indicating the selected advance notice effect pattern is stored in the sub RAM 93 as setting information of the advance notice effect.

Then, the sub CPU 91 has information indicating the selected variation effect pattern and information indicating the selected advance notice effect pattern at the start of the variation display of the second special symbol (or the first special symbol) in the probability variation game period or the time saving game period. And, a variation effect start command including, is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120). On the other hand, by executing the process based on the variation effect start command received by the image / sound control CPU 101 of the image / sound control board 100 (and the lamp CPU 121 of the lamp control board 120), the set effect mode is adjusted. Variable production and advance notice production will be realized.

<Types of selectable songs>
Next, the selectable music that the player can select will be described. FIG. 21 (A) exemplifies selectable music that can be selected by the player during the probabilistic game period, and FIG. 21 (B) shows selectable music that can be selected by the player during the time-saving game period following the probabilistic game period. It is an example of a musical piece.

(About selectable songs that can be selected by the player during the probabilistic game period)
As illustrated in FIG. 21 (A), in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the music X-1, the music X-2, and the music X-3 are selectable music that the player can select during the probabilistic game period. , Music X-4, Music X-5, Music X-6, Music X-7, Music X-8, and Music X-9. That is, in the acoustic ROM 108, the acoustic data for reproducing the music X-1, the acoustic data for reproducing the music X-2, the acoustic data for reproducing the music X-3, and the music X-4 Sound data for playing music X-5, sound data for playing music X-5, sound data for playing music X-6, sound data for playing music X-7, and music X. The acoustic data for reproducing −8 and the acoustic data for reproducing the music X-9 are stored.

When the music is being played during the probabilistic game period (and the time-saving game period), information indicating the music being played (playing music information) is stored in the control RAM 103 (see FIG. 5). On the other hand, if the left or right key of the cross key is operated while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner during the probabilistic game period (or time-saving game period), the operation command to notify that fact is sub. It is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100 by the CPU 91. Based on this operation command, the image / sound control CPU 101 of the image / sound control board 100 updates the music information being played, which is stored in the control RAM 103, and displays the music information displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70. Update at the same time. Then, the image / acoustic control CPU 101 reads the acoustic data for reproducing the music specified based on the information indicating the music being reproduced from the acoustic data stored in the acoustic ROM 108 from the acoustic ROM 108 to the SDRAM 109. The acoustic DSP 107 is instructed to execute the data processing and output the acoustic data after the data processing to the speaker 38 (via the amplifier 110). As a result, the music being played is changed to the music selected by operating the left key or the right key.

(About music playback immediately after shifting to the probabilistic game period)
Immediately after the jackpot game is completed and the probabilistic game period is entered, the player has not performed the selection operation for the selectable music in the probabilistic game period. Therefore, immediately after the transition to the probabilistic game period, the following processing is executed for music reproduction.

That is, the cursor is positioned on the sub CPU 91 when the valid period related to the mode selection promotion effect during the ending period of the jackpot game ends based on the data related to the image / sound control transmitted from the image / sound control board 100. A mode image is specified, and information indicating an effect mode corresponding to the mode image is stored in the sub RAM 93 as mode information. Specifically, for example, when the cursor is located on the mode A image at the end of the valid period, the mode information indicating the effect mode A is stored in the sub RAM 93. Note that this mode information is appropriately updated each time a change operation for changing the effect mode is performed.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 21 (A), among the nine songs that the player can select during the probabilistic game period, the music X-1 is the main music of the production mode A. The music X-4 is set as the main music of the production mode B, and the music X-7 is set as the main music of the production mode C.

Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 starts the first probabilistic game in the probabilistic game period in a state where the mode information indicating the effect mode A is stored in the sub RAM 93, the sub CPU 91 starts the music X-1 (see FIG. 21 (A)). ), A variation effect start command including information for instructing the start of reproduction is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100. Further, when the first probabilistic game in the probabilistic game period is started in the state where the mode information indicating the effect mode B is stored in the sub RAM 93, the playback of the music X-4 (see FIG. 21 (A)) is started. A variation effect start command including the instruction information is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100. Further, when the first probabilistic game in the probabilistic game period is started in the state where the mode information indicating the effect mode C is stored in the sub RAM 93, the playback of the music X-7 (see FIG. 21 (A)) is started. A variation effect start command including the instruction information is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100.

By executing such a process, the player does not select a song, and the playback of a different song is started for each effect mode. Therefore, the effect mode selected for the mode selection promotion effect Compared to the case where the same music is started to be played regardless of which of the production modes A to C, the interest in the music reproduction can be improved, and in each production mode. It is possible to obtain a high effect by the synergistic effect of the variable effect (and the advance notice effect) and the music reproduction.

(Regarding selectable songs that can be selected by the player during the time-saving game period following the probabilistic game period)
As illustrated in FIG. 21 (B), the selectable songs that can be selected by the player in the time-saving game period following the probabilistic game period include the songs X-1 to X-9 that can be selected in the probabilistic game period. In addition to the nine songs, music Y-1, music Y-2, and music Y-3 are prepared. Therefore, in the acoustic ROM 108, in addition to the nine acoustic data corresponding to each of the music X-1 to the music X-9, the acoustic data for reproducing the music Y-1 and the music Y-2 are reproduced. And the acoustic data for reproducing the music Y-3 are stored.

As is clear from the comparison between FIGS. 21 (A) and 21 (B), the nine songs of songs X-1 to X-9 have either a probabilistic game period or a time-saving game period following the probabilistic game period. It is a common song that the player can arbitrarily select. On the other hand, the songs Y-1 to Y-3 are additional songs that cannot be selected by the player during the probabilistic game period and can be selected only after the time-saving game period. As described above, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a desired song can be selected from nine songs during the probabilistic game period, whereas 12 songs (12 songs) during the time-saving game period. = 9 songs + 3 songs), you can select the desired song.

If the player cannot assign a "big hit" during the probabilistic game period and shifts to the time-saving game period, the high base state is maintained, but from the notations shown in FIGS. 6 (A) to 6 (C). As is clear, the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) that was executed in the high probability state is now executed in the low probability state. For this reason, regarding the transition from the probabilistic game period to the time-saving game period, the player is not disadvantaged in that the state in which the game ball is easily won at the second starting port 22 continues, but the winning probability of the "big hit" is In terms of the decrease, it can be said that the player is in a disadvantageous state. In addition, if the player can select only nine songs X-1 to X-9, which are the same as during the time-saving game period, the "big hit" cannot be assigned to the probabilistic game period. You will hear the same song that you were listening to, and as a result, you may end up playing a short-time game with the unpleasant feeling that you couldn't get the "big hit."

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the time-saving gaming period is entered, the music Y-1 to the music Y-3, which could not be selected during the probabilistic gaming period, can be selected. By performing a change operation to change the music being played to one of music Y-1 to music Y-3, it is possible to switch feelings and aim for a "big hit" during the time-saving game period.

<About the flow of games and music playback during the probabilistic game period and the time-saving game period>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 22, the flow of the game and the music reproduction in the probabilistic game period and the time-saving game period will be described. A jackpot game including a long-open round game in which the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are long-opened (in this embodiment, the 3R probability variation A, 10R probability variation A, exemplified in FIGS. 6B and 6C). Alternatively, if the jackpot game related to the 3R probability variation B) is executed and the game ball wins a V prize during this long open round game, the probability variation game period described above is reached after the jackpot game ends, and the first probability variation game is started. (See FIG. 22 (A)). This probabilistic game is executed up to 100 times unless it is determined as a "big hit" in the middle.

First, the sub CPU 91 shifts to the probabilistic game period and starts playing the main music according to the production mode as the first probabilistic game is started (see FIG. 22B). Specifically, when the mode information indicating that the effect mode A is set is stored in the sub RAM 93, the music X-1 which is the main music of the effect mode A (see FIG. 21 (A)). A variation effect start command including information for instructing the start of reproduction is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100. Further, when the mode information indicating that the effect mode B is set is stored in the sub RAM 93, the playback of the music X-4 (see FIG. 21 (A)), which is the main music of the effect mode B, is started. A variation effect start command including the instruction information is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100. Further, when the mode information indicating that the effect mode C is set is stored in the sub RAM 93, the playback of the music X-7 (see FIG. 21 (A)), which is the main music of the effect mode C, is started. A variation effect start command including the instruction information is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100.

When the reproduction of the main music corresponding to the effect mode being set is started in this way, the music information indicating the music being played is displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70. Here, when the music X-1 corresponding to the production mode A is being played, the music information indicating the music X-1 is displayed, and when the music X-4 corresponding to the production mode B is being played, the music information is displayed. , The music information indicating the music X-4 is displayed, and when the music X-7 corresponding to the production mode C is being played, the music information indicating the music X-7 is displayed. The display of the music information is as described above based on FIG.

In addition, during the probabilistic game period, as long as the player strikes right, the hold related to the second special symbol determination can be easily accumulated, and the variation time as the variation pattern of the second special symbol is Relatively short fluctuation patterns are likely to be selected. Therefore, during the probabilistic game period, the change display and the stop display of the second special symbol alternate in a relatively short time, except when the reach effect and the hit notification effect are executed during the probabilistic game. It will be repeated. Then, as described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, music selection is permitted during the variable display of the special symbol during the probabilistic game period (or the time-saving game period), and the probabilistic game period (or the time-saving game period). Music selection is restricted during the stop display of the special symbol in. Therefore, in the process of alternately repeating the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol during the probabilistic game period (or the time-saving game period), the high-brightness left key image and the right key image are displayed on both the left and right sides of the music information. The degree state (see FIG. 20 (B)) and the low brightness state (see FIG. 20 (A)) in which a low-brightness left key image and a right key image are displayed on both the left and right sides of the music information occur alternately. It will be.

Here, if the left key or the right key of the cross key is operated while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the above-mentioned high brightness state is set, a detection signal indicating that the left key has been operated ( Alternatively, a detection signal indicating that the right key has been operated) is output from the key operation detection sensor to the sub control board 90, and the sub CPU 91 detects that a change operation for the music being played has been performed (FIG. 22). (C)).

When the change operation for the music being played is performed in this way, the music change process for changing the music being played is executed (see FIG. 22 (D)). Specifically, when the change operation for the music being played is performed, the sub CPU 91 indicates that the left key has been operated (or the right key has been operated) by the process of step S31 in FIG. 38, which will be described later. The operation command to be notified is set in the sub RAM 93, and the operation command is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100 by the process of step S32 in FIG. 38.

On the other hand, the image / sound control CPU 101 of the image / sound control board 100 first updates the music information being played, which is stored in the control RAM 103, based on the received operation command. For example, a operation command for notifying that the left key has been operated is received while the music being played information indicating that the music being played is music X-4 (see FIG. 21 (A)) is stored. In this case, the music being played information is updated so as to be information indicating that the music being played is the music X-3. Further, for example, when the operation command notifying that the right key has been operated is received in the state where the music being played information indicating that the music being played is the music X-4 is stored, the music being played is being played. The music information being played is updated so as to be information indicating that the music is music X-5.

When the image / sound control CPU 101 updates the music information during playback stored in the control RAM 103 in this way, the music information (see FIG. 20) displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70 is updated. The VDP 104 is instructed to execute the music information change display for changing the music information so that the music information indicates the music specified by the music information being played. In addition, from the acoustic data stored in the acoustic ROM 108, the acoustic data for reproducing the music specified by the updated music information during playback is read into the SDRAM 109, data processing is executed, and the data processing is performed. The acoustic DSP 107 is instructed to execute the process of outputting the acoustic data to the speaker 38 (via the amplifier 110).

By such a music change process, the music output from the speaker 38 is changed to another music, and the music information on the display screen 70 is updated so as to indicate the other music. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the music being played is changed until the probability variation game period ends, that is, until the probability variation game is executed 100 times after the jackpot game ends. Each time the change operation is detected, the above-mentioned music change process is executed (see FIGS. 22C to 22D).

On the other hand, if the judgment results of the special symbol determination (basically, the second special symbol determination) performed in the 100 probability variation games during the probability variation game period are all "missing", the 100th probability variation game is performed. After the end (see FIG. 22 (E)), the first time-saving game will be started (see FIG. 22 (F)). That is, the probabilistic game period will shift to the time-saving game period.

Here, when the first time-saving game is started, different music reproduction control is performed depending on whether the music being played is changed or not during the probability variation game period. That is, when the music being played is not changed during the probabilistic game period, that is, at the start of the probabilistic game period, the music X-1 corresponding to the effect mode A, the music X-4 corresponding to the effect mode B, and , If any of the songs X-7 corresponding to the production mode C is started to be played and the music is not changed until the end of the probabilistic game period, the player is motivated to listen to the other music. Therefore, even if the music being played is changed to another music, it is unlikely that the player will be uncomfortable. Further, when the probability variation game period is changed to the time-saving game period, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases and it becomes difficult for the player to assign the “big hit”.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the player does not change the music from the start to the end of the probabilistic game period, the music being played is changed to one of the additional music ( See FIG. 22 (G)). Specifically, the sub CPU 91 never transmits an operation command for notifying that the left key or the right key has been operated to the image / sound control board 100 between the start and the end of the probabilistic game period. In this case, at the start of the first time-saving game during the time-saving game period, a variable effect start command including information instructing to change the music being played to an additional music is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100.

On the other hand, when the image / sound control CPU 101 of the image / sound control board 100 receives the above-mentioned variation effect start command including the information instructing the change to the additional music, the additional music exemplified in FIG. 21 (B). Playback stored in the control RAM 103 so as to execute a production lottery for selecting one of the music Y-1 to music Y-3, and indicate the additional music selected based on the result of the production lottery. Update the middle music information. Then, the VDP 104 is instructed to execute the music information change display for changing the music information so as to be the music information indicating the music (here, any additional music) specified by the updated music information being played. Further, for the acoustic DSP 107, from the acoustic data stored in the acoustic ROM 108, the acoustic data for reproducing the additional music specified by the updated music information during playback is read into the SDRAM 109 for data processing. It is instructed to execute the process of outputting the acoustic data after the data processing to the speaker 38 (via the amplifier 110).

If the music change operation is not performed during the probabilistic game period due to the execution of such processing by the sub CPU 91 and the image / sound control CPU 101, playback is performed when shifting from the probabilistic game period to the time-saving game period. The music inside is changed to the additional music, and the playback of the additional music is started (see FIGS. 22 (F) and 22 (G)). Although detailed description is omitted, when the time-saving game period is entered, the variable effect and the advance notice effect are executed in an effect mode different from that during the probabilistic game period. For this reason, the player is advised to switch the unfortunate feeling that the "big hit" was not assigned during the probabilistic game period by changing the production mode of the variable production (and the advance notice production) and changing the music to an additional music. On the other hand, it can be effectively promoted, and a high effect can be obtained by the synergistic effect of the change in the effect mode of the variable effect (and the advance notice effect) and the change of the music to the additional music.

On the other hand, if the music change operation is performed during the probabilistic game period, there is a possibility that the music desired by the player is being played. Therefore, it is considered unfavorable to change the music being played to an additional music regardless of the operation of the player.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the changing operation for the music being played is performed during the probabilistic game period, the music being played is continued to be played even after the transition to the time-saving game period (reproduction). The song inside is not changed to another song). That is, if the sub CPU 91 has not transmitted an operation command notifying that the left key or the right key has been operated to the image / sound control board 100 even once during the probabilistic game period, the sub CPU 91 is in the time saving game period. At the start of the first time-saving game, the music being played at the end of the probabilistic game period is transmitted by transmitting a variable effect start command that does not include information for instructing the change of the music being played to the image / sound control board 100. It is decided to continue playing even after shifting to the time-saving game period.

The sub CPU 91 is based on the fact that a detection signal indicating that the left key has been operated or a detection signal indicating that the right key has been operated has been input during the variable display of the special symbol during the time saving game period. Therefore, it may be detected that a change operation has been performed on the music being played (see FIG. 22 (H)). In such a case, the sub CPU 91 and the image / sound control CPU 101 execute a music change process for changing the music being played (see FIG. 22 (I)). As is clear from the comparison of FIGS. 21 (A) and 21 (B), the music change process exemplified in FIG. 22 (I) differs only in the number and types of selectable music, and is shown in FIG. 22 (D). It is performed in the same manner as the above-mentioned music change processing based on. Therefore, with respect to the music change process exemplified in FIG. 22 (I), the description of the process executed by the sub CPU 91 and the image / sound control CPU 101 will be omitted.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the music being played is changed until the time saving game period ends, that is, until the 100th time saving game ends after the transition to the time saving game period. Each time an operation is detected, the above-mentioned music change process is executed (see FIGS. 22H to 22I).

As illustrated in FIG. 22 (J), if the player is not assigned a "big hit" even during the time-saving game period following the probability variation game period, the time-saving game period ends and the game in the normal game state starts. As a result, the playback of the selectable music is terminated (see FIG. 22 (K)). Specifically, the sub CPU 91 provides information instructing the reproduction of the variable effect sound that is reproduced with the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state as the game is started in the normal game state. The variation effect start command including the variation effect is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100. That is, when the selectable music being played is changed to the variable effect sound, the playback of the selectable music ends.

(About the gaming machine 1 that can execute music playback control)
Up to this point, the music reproduction control in the probabilistic gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (following the probabilistic gaming state) has been described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 22, but the gaming machine 1 capable of executing such music reproduction control is , Can be regarded as the following game machines.

An operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, a cross key),
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes a jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 31: see FIG. 5).
When the determination is made, a predetermined symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42) is made to display the symbol (for example, the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in a variable manner. Then, the symbol display control means (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 28) for stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the result of the determination, and
When the symbol indicating that the determination is made by the determination means when the special game is executed is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, the special game execution means for executing the special game (for example, the large in step S6 of FIG. 28). The main CPU 81) that executes the winning opening open / close control process,
A production control means for controlling the production (for example, sub CPU 91: see FIG. 5) is provided.
The effect control means
During the first period (for example, during the probabilistic game period) in which the first number of times (for example, 100 times) of the determination (for example, the second special symbol determination or the first special symbol determination) is performed after the end of the special game, One of a plurality of songs (for example, songs X-1 to X-9: see FIG. 21 (A)) is played, and the plurality of songs being played are played based on the operation with respect to the operating means. 1st playback control (see, for example, FIGS. 22C and 22D) for changing to another song among the songs of
During the second period (for example, during the time-saving game period) in which the determination is performed a second time (for example, 100 times) after the first period, a song (for example, a song Y) that is not included in the plurality of songs. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a second reproduction control for reproducing (-1 to music Y-3: see FIG. 21 (B)).

According to this gaming machine, songs that are not played during the first period (for example, songs Y-1 to Y-3: see FIG. 21 (B)) are played during the second period. For example, when the player shifts to the second period without being determined to perform the special game during the first period, the player listens to the music that could not be heard during the first period and plays the game. It is possible to enjoy it. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the player's discomfort increases due to the fact that the so-called jackpot cannot be easily assigned.

(Other configurations related to music playback control)
The following configurations may be adopted for the music reproduction control described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 22. That is, in the present embodiment, the case where the first number of times and the second number of times are the same number of times has been described as an example, but the first number of times and the second number of times may be different times from each other. Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first number of times is 100 times and the second number of times is also 100 times has been described as an example, but these times are merely examples and may be other times. Needless to say.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where the gaming state during the second period (in the present embodiment, the time-saving gaming state) is different from the gaming state during the first period (in the present embodiment, the probabilistic gaming state) has been described as an example. However, the gaming state during the second period may be the same gaming state as the gaming state during the first period. Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the gaming state during the first period is the probabilistic gaming state will be described as an example, but the gaming state during the first period is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. If there is, the gaming state may be different from the probabilistic gaming state. Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the gaming state during the second period is the time-saving gaming state will be described as an example, but the gaming state during the second period is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. If so, the game state may be different from the time-saving game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where the player is more advantageous to the player during the first period than during the second period will be described as an example regarding the ease of assigning a jackpot by the player, but in other embodiments, the case where the player is more advantageous to the player than during the second period will be described. A configuration may be adopted in which the player is more advantageous during the second period than during the first period.

Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the production mode during the first period, a case where three production modes A to production mode C are prepared will be described as an example, but the types and numbers of the production modes are limited to this. Not limited to this, for example, the effect mode during the first period may be fixed to one, the effect mode during the second period may be two, or the effect mode during the first period may be one. There may be four or more.

Further, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 6 (B) and 6 (C), a jackpot (3R probability variation A, 10R probability variation A, 3R probability variation B) that shifts to a shorter game period after the probability variation game period, and A jackpot (10R probability variation B, 3R probability variation C) that does not shift to the time saving game period after the probability variation game period is prepared. Therefore, in order to notify whether or not to shift to the time-saving game period following the probability-changing game period, whether or not to shift to the time-saving game period during the 100th time-saving game, which is the last probability-changing game in the probability-changing game period. It is also possible to execute a notification effect for notifying.

[Look-ahead / button production]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25, the look-ahead and the button effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 23 is a screen view illustrating an effect performed before the start of the fluctuation in the look-ahead / button effect. FIG. 24 is a screen view illustrating a reach establishment failure effect performed during the fluctuation of the look-ahead / button effect. FIG. 25 is a screen view illustrating a reach establishment success effect performed during the fluctuation of the look-ahead / button effect.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of pre-reading and performing the button effect. The look-ahead / button effect in the present embodiment is the result of the pre-judgment processing performed for the hold when the right of the first special symbol judgment is held while the game is controlled in the normal game state. It is an effect that is executed based on the effect, and is an effect that is executed over "pre-target variation" and "look-ahead target variation". Here, the "look-ahead target variation" means a variation display of the first special symbol (an example of "specific variation display") corresponding to the right of the first special symbol determination in which the above-mentioned pre-judgment processing has been performed. "Pre-target variation" means a variation display of the first special symbol performed before the look-ahead target variation.

In addition, although the look-ahead / button effect executed over the two pre-target fluctuations and the look-ahead target variation will be described here, the look-ahead / relevant button over the one pre-target variation and the look-ahead target variation. In some cases, the effect is executed, or in some cases, the look-ahead / button effect is executed over the three pre-target fluctuations and the look-ahead target variation.

FIG. 23A shows a first special symbol and an effect corresponding to the icon (here, the white icon) displayed in the icon display area 72 when the game is controlled in the normal game state. The state immediately after the start of the variable display of the symbol is illustrated. As illustrated in FIG. 23 (A), in the hold icon display area 71, the two hold icons have become one with the start of the symbol change this time, and the effect symbol display area 73 (FIG. In (see 2), the scroll display of the three symbol strings is performed.

In FIG. 23 (B), when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol illustrated in FIG. 23 (A) and the left two symbols are pseudo-stopped. 1 An example shows that a game ball wins a prize in the starting port 21 and a second hold icon is newly displayed in the hold icon display area 71.

In this way, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 21 and the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved during the variable display of the first special symbol, the pre-determination process is executed for this right. Various effects are performed based on the result of this pre-determination process (pre-determination result). FIG. 23 (B) illustrates how the second hold icon is displayed as a blue hold icon from the beginning by the icon change effect based on the preliminary determination result. Here, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead / button effect based on the preliminary determination result, the following effect is performed.

That is, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead / button effect, the restraint button is displayed in the lower right area of the display screen 70 almost at the same time as the second hold icon (here, the blue hold icon) is displayed. The image is displayed (see FIG. 23 (B)). This restraint button image shows that the first effect button 35 is bound and restrained by a chain, and that the first effect button 35 does not move (is not pressed) even if the first effect button 35 is operated. It is a production image, and is a production image including the characters "HOLD". Further, the restraint button image is an effect image that does not include an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the effective period in which the operation of the first effect button 35 is effective.

In this way, at the timing when a new prize is generated for the first starting port 21, the first effect button 35 in a state of being tied to the chain and the characters "HOLD" are displayed, so that the player who sees the restraint button image. Is that there is a possibility that a button effect (the button effect: see FIGS. 24 (D) and 25 (A)) prompting the player to operate the first effect button 35 may be executed, and that the button effect may be executed. It is possible to easily recognize that the state is before the expiration of the valid period (that is, before the start of the button effect).

Note that FIG. 23 (B) illustrates that the blue hold icon is displayed as the second hold icon almost at the same time as the restraint button image, but the second hold icon is in another color. A special icon may be displayed, or a white hold icon may be displayed.

When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of displaying the restraint button image, the restraint button vibration effect is started (see FIG. 23C). This restraint button vibration effect is an effect showing how the first effect button 35 represented by the restraint button image vibrates while trying to escape from the chain. FIG. 23C exemplifies a state in which the restraint button vibration effect is executed with the two symbols on the left and the three symbols on the right pseudo-stopped.

It should be noted that the restraint button vibration effect illustrated in FIG. 23 (C) is being executed during the variation display of the first special symbol two before the look-ahead target variation, and FIG. 23 (B) shows 2. It can be said that this is an example of how the restraint button vibration effect is executed in the first pre-target fluctuation of the pre-target fluctuations.

Further, the restraint button vibration effect is continuously executed until the first pre-target fluctuation is completed after the restraint button image is displayed, but during the period until the first pre-target fluctuation is completed, The restraint button vibration effect and the restraint button stationary effect indicating that the first effect button 35 represented by the restraint button image is stationary may be alternately repeated.

When the variation display of the first special symbol as the first pre-target variation is completed, the lost symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, and the display screen 70 shows three effects of "265". The symbol stops (see FIG. 23 (D)). In this way, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed and the effect symbol is finally stopped, the restraint button vibration effect is interrupted and the restraint button image showing the state in which the first effect button 35 is stationary is displayed. Will be done. That is, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the restraint button stationary effect is executed.

As described above, a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol and the three production symbols indicating the disparity of "265" are stopped. ) Elapses, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon (here, the white hold icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is executed. When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing" and a variation pattern in which the non-reach effect is executed is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the second pre-target variation occurs. To be started.

That is, the hold icon is displayed as the change display of the first special symbol (second pre-target change) is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon. The earliest hold icon displayed in the area 71 is shifted to the icon display area 72, and the scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (see FIGS. 23 (D) and 23 (E)). Further, as the earliest hold icon shifts to the icon display area 72, the hold icon to be read ahead (here, the blue hold icon) shifts and is displayed as the earliest hold icon. Then, as the second pre-target fluctuation is started, the interrupted restraint button vibration effect is resumed (see FIGS. 23 (D) and 23 (E)).

In this way, after the restraint button vibration effect is restarted with the start of the second pre-target fluctuation, when the final stage of the second pre-target fluctuation is approached, for example, three "841" variations are shown. The effect symbols are in a pseudo-stopped state (see FIG. 23 (F)), and as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, these three effect symbols are finally stopped (see FIG. 23 (G)). .. Here, since the first special symbol is stopped and displayed and the effect symbol is actually stopped, the restraint button vibration effect is interrupted as described above based on FIG. 23 (D). Become.

In this way, the restraint button vibration effect is continuously executed during the period from the start to the end of the second pre-target fluctuation. For example, during this period, the restraint button vibration effect and the restraint are performed. The button still effect may be repeated alternately.

(When the reach is not established due to the change in the look-ahead target)
As described above, a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol and the three effect symbols indicating the disparity of "841" are stopped. ) Elapses, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon (here, the blue hold icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is executed. When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing" and a variation pattern in which the non-reach effect is executed is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the look-ahead target variation is started. ..

That is, as the variation display of the first special symbol (pre-reading target variation) is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon, the hold icon display area 71 is displayed. The earliest displayed hold icon (here, the blue hold icon) is shifted to the icon display area 72, and the scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (FIGS. 23 (G) and (H)). reference). Then, as the look-ahead target variation is started, the interrupted restraint button vibration effect is resumed (see FIGS. 23 (G) and 23 (H)).

In this way, after the restraint button vibration effect is restarted with the start of the look-ahead target change and a predetermined time elapses from the start of the look-ahead target change, for example, the left three symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 23 (I)). ). Subsequently, when a further time elapses after the three symbols on the left are pseudo-stopped, an effect display showing how the three symbols on the right slowly descend from above is performed (see FIG. 24 (A)). Then, when the right three symbols descend to a position slightly higher than the position where the left three symbols are pseudo-stopped, the button release effect is executed (see FIG. 24 (B)). This button release effect is an effect showing that the first effect button 35 restrained by the chain is released. Specifically, the chain restraining the first effect button 35 is shattered and the first effect is generated. It is an effect showing how the effect button 35 is released. By executing such a button release effect, the first effect button image imitating the first effect button 35 is displayed at the position where the restraint button image was displayed.

In this way, when the button release effect is executed and the first effect button image is displayed, the first effect button image displayed in the lower right area on the display screen 70 is displayed while rotating counterclockwise once. A button movement effect indicating the state of moving to the central region on the screen 70 is executed (see FIG. 24C).

Then, when the first effect button image moves to the central region on the display screen 70, the operation promotion effect (that is, the button effect) in the look-ahead target variation is started (see FIG. 24 (D)). Specifically, when the first effect button image moves to the central region on the display screen 70, the first effect button image and the valid period related to the button effect are started as illustrated in FIG. 24 (D). Along with this, the characters "press!" Representing the operation content for the first effect button 35 and the validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period are displayed.

Here, at the start of the pre-reading target variation, the variation pattern of the first special symbol on which the non-reach effect is executed is selected. Therefore, depending on whether the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period or the valid period ends without the first effect button 35 being operated, as an operation-corresponding effect for the button effect. The reach establishment failure effect is executed (see FIGS. 24 (E) to 24 (G)).

Specifically, the button effect is produced at the timing when the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the button effect, or at the timing when the valid period ends without operating the first effect button 35. The effect image (first button image, character "press!", Validity period gauge) according to the above is erased from the display screen 70 (see FIGS. 24 (D) and 24 (E)). Then, slippage occurs in the three symbols on the right (see FIG. 24 (E)), and the scroll display of the symbols in the right column is restarted (see FIG. 24 (F)). After that, when the scroll speed of the symbol row in the right column decreases, an effect display showing how the middle 4 symbols and the right 4 symbols descend at the same time is executed (see FIG. 24 (G)).

When such a reach establishment failure effect is executed, the left 3 symbols, the middle 4 symbols, and the right 4 symbols are arranged in a horizontal row and pseudo-stop (see FIG. 24 (H)), and the first special symbol is executed. As the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, these three effect symbols are finally stopped (see FIG. 24 (I)).

(When reach is established due to changes in the look-ahead target)
Up to this point, as the variation pattern of the first special symbol related to the look-ahead target variation, the effect of the look-ahead target variation when the variation pattern in which the reachless effect is to be executed is selected has been described. When a variation pattern in which the effect with reach is to be executed is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the following effect is executed.

That is, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol on which the effect with reach is to be executed is selected at the start of the look-ahead target variation, the said at the timing when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the look-ahead target variation. A button effect is executed (see FIG. 25 (A)). Note that FIG. 25 (A) illustrates a state in which the button effect is executed in the process of descending the right 7 symbols while the left 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped, but it can be a reach symbol. Except for the fact that the types of effect symbols are different, the effects from the start of the look-ahead target variation to the start of the button effect are shown in FIGS. 23 (H) to (I) and 24 (A) to (A). It is performed in the same manner as described above based on D).

FIG. 25 (A) illustrates how the button effect similar to that illustrated in FIG. 24 (D) is being executed with the left 7 symbols and the right 7 symbols displayed. Here, since the variation pattern of the first special symbol on which the effect with reach is to be executed is selected at the start of the change of the look-ahead target, the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period, or In response to the expiration of the valid period without operating the first effect button 35, the reach establishment success effect is executed as an operation-corresponding effect for the button effect (see FIG. 25 (B)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 25 (A), the right 7 symbols, which had descended to a position slightly higher than the left 7 symbols, further descend and become the same height as the left 7 symbols. It will be in a pseudo-stopped state side by side, and a linear image with the characters "Gekiatsu !!" will be displayed so as to cross over these production patterns, and at the same time, the voice "Gekiatsu !!" will be heard from the speaker. It is output from 38 (see FIG. 25 (B)).

When the reach establishment success effect is executed in this way, the normal reach is executed in the same manner as described above based on FIGS. 11 (A) and 11 (B) (see FIGS. 25 (C) and 25 (D)), and then. The development effect is executed in the same manner as illustrated in FIG. 11 (C) (see FIG. 25 (E)), and the reach is developed into a highly reliable reach such as SP reach and SPSP reach.

Here, the case where the normal reach is executed after the reach is established and then the high reliability reach is developed will be described as an example. However, for example, it is possible to directly develop the SPSP reach after the reach is established without going through the normal reach. is there.

(About game machine 1 that can perform look-ahead and the button effect)
Up to this point, specific examples of pre-reading and the button effect have been described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25, but the gaming machine 1 capable of executing such pre-reading and the button effect is as the following gaming machine. You can catch it.

Input means that can be input by the player (for example, the first effect button 35) and
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 31: see FIG. 5).
When the determination is made, a predetermined symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display 41) is made to display the symbol (for example, the first special symbol) in a variable manner, and then the symbol indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed. With the symbol display control means (for example, main CPU 81),
When the symbol indicating that the special game is determined to be executed by the determination means is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, the special game execution means for executing the special game (for example, the large in step S6 of FIG. 28). The main CPU 81) that executes the winning opening open / close control process,
A production control means for controlling the production (for example, sub CPU 91: see FIG. 5) is provided.
The effect control means
With the first display control (see, for example, FIGS. 24 (D) and 25 (A)) for displaying an input promotion image (for example, an effect image including the first effect button image) that prompts the player to input to the input means. ,
The first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 23B) before the start of the specific variation display (for example, the look-ahead target variation), which is the variation display of the symbol on which the input promotion image is displayed, is a new prize for the look-ahead target. The period from the occurrence of the above to the start of the look-ahead target variation) and the second period from the start of the specific variation display to the start of the display of the input promotion image (for example, FIG. 23 (H)). It is suggested that the input promotion image can be displayed during both the period from the display illustrated in (B) to the execution of the button release effect illustrated in FIG. 24 (B). It is possible to execute a second display control (for example, see FIGS. 23 (B) to (G)) for displaying a suggestion image (for example, a restraint button image).
In response to the input to the input means while the input promotion image is being displayed, a predetermined input correspondence effect (for example, reach establishment failure effect: FIGS. 24 (E) to 24 (G), reach establishment success effect: FIG. 25 (B)). A gaming machine characterized in that it executes (see).

According to this gaming machine, the display of the input promotion image (for example, the effect image including the first effect button image) is started after the specific variation display (for example, the look-ahead target variation) in which the input promotion image is displayed is started. The suggestion image (for example, the restraint button image) is displayed not only during the second period until the above, but also during the first period before the specific variation display is started. Therefore, the player can recognize that the input promotion image can be displayed at an early stage, and when the input promotion image is displayed, it is possible to input to the input means with a margin.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment capable of performing pre-reading and the button effect can be regarded as the following gaming machine.
The effect control means
The first display control (for example, the first effect button image, the characters "press!", And the button effect, which displays the input promotion image in a mode suggesting that the input to the input means is effective. Display control to display the validity period gauge: see FIGS. 24 (D) and 25 (A)),
The second display control (for example, a state in which the first effect button 35 is bound and restrained by a chain, which displays the suggested image in a mode that does not suggest that the input to the input means is effective, is represented by "HOLD". Display control for displaying a restraint button image including the characters ": 23 (B) to (I), see FIGS. 24 (A)).

According to this gaming machine, the input promotion image suggests that the input to the input means is valid, whereas the suggestion image that does not suggest that the input to the input means is valid is displayed. It is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the player who sees the image misunderstands that the input to the input means is effective.

(Pre-reading / other configurations related to the button production)
The following configuration may be adopted for the look-ahead / button effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, a case where the button release effect and the button movement effect are executed during the period from the end of the display of the restraint button image to the start of the button effect will be described as an example (FIG. 24 (FIG. 24). A)-(D)). On the other hand, in other embodiments, for example, either one of the button release effect and the button movement effect may be executed, or both of these effects may not be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where the display position of the restraint button image (see FIG. 24 (A)) and the display position of the first effect button image (see FIG. 24 (D)) are different from each other will be described as an example. The display positions of these button images may be the same. In order to make the display positions of these button images the same, for example, the restraint button image is displayed at the same display position where the first effect button image is displayed, the restraint vibration button effect is executed, and the button effect is performed. It is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the button release effect is executed without executing the button movement effect before (see FIG. 24D) is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the restraint button image vibrates on the spot by executing the restraint button vibration effect during the period from the start to the end of the display of the restraint button image (slight movement). (Repeat) will be described as an example, but the restraint button image may be moved or kept completely stationary during the display period of the restraint button image.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display of FIG. 24 (B) is performed during the period from the start of the display of the restraint button image to the start of the button release effect, that is, after the display of FIG. 23 (B) is started. The case where the restraint button image is always displayed will be described as an example during the period until the start of the operation, but in other embodiments, for example, the restraint button image is alternately displayed and hidden. The restraint button image may be temporarily hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, while the button effect is being executed (see FIGS. 24 (D) and 25 (A)), a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 35 is displayed, and the button effect is displayed. Before the start, there is a case where a button image whose display contents are partially different from the first effect button image is displayed, such as displaying a restraint button image imitating the first effect button 35 in a chained state. Let's take an example. On the other hand, in another embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a common button image having the same display content as the first effect button image is displayed before the start of the button effect. However, if such a configuration is adopted, the player who visually recognizes the common button image may mistakenly recognize that the button effect is being executed. Therefore, for example, the display content is common to the first effect button image. In addition, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which a common button image representing the semitransparent first effect button 35 is displayed.

[Read-ahead button production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the look-ahead button effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the look-ahead continuous button effect. The pre-reading / button effect described above based on FIGS. 23 to 25 is performed at least once (twice in the example shown in FIGS. 23 (B) to (G)) and the pre-reading target variation. Although it is a button effect executed by using, the pre-reading continuous button effect is executed by using two pre-target fluctuations before the start of the pre-reading target variation without using the pre-reading target variation. -It is a different effect from the button effect.

Two pre-target changes, the first pre-target change (first pre-target change) and the second pre-target change (second pre-target change), are executed before the look-ahead target change is started. In such a case, the look-ahead button effect may be executed based on the preliminary judgment result relating to the right of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the change in the look-ahead target. The flow of this look-ahead button effect is as follows.

(Direction in the first pre-target fluctuation)
First, the first pre-target variation is started (see FIG. 26 (A)). Specifically, it includes a first hold icon corresponding to the first pre-target variation, a second hold icon corresponding to the second pre-target variation, and a third hold icon corresponding to the look-ahead target variation. When at least three hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 71, the first special corresponding to the first hold icon (hold icon corresponding to the first pre-target fluctuation), which is the earliest hold icon. The symbol determination is executed, and the variation display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol (an example of the "first variation display") as the first pre-target variation is started. Along with this, the second hold icon and the third hold icon are shifted in the hold icon display area 71, and the second hold icon is displayed as the earliest hold icon.

When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the first pre-target variation in this way, the first operation promotion effect (an example of "first input promotion notification") is executed (see FIG. 26B). Specifically, as an effect of urging the player to operate the first effect button 35, the first effect button imitating the first effect button 35 during the valid period of the first effect button 35 related to the first operation promotion effect. An effect of displaying an image, a character "press!" Indicates the operation content for the first effect button 35, and an effect period gauge indicating the remaining time of the effect period is executed.

When the player operates the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the first operation promotion effect, the first operation-compatible effect corresponding to the operation of the first effect button 35 (“first input-compatible effect”). As an example), a low reliability suggestion effect (an example of "first possibility suggestion effect": see FIG. 26C) is executed, and a high reliability suggestion effect ("second possibility suggestion effect"). One example: (see FIG. 26C) is executed, and there are cases where neither of these reliability suggestion effects is executed.

Although not shown in the figure, before the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the first operation promotion effect, a background image (daytime background) showing the daytime state of a certain place is displayed on the display screen 70. It is displayed in. The above-mentioned low reliability suggestion effect suggests that the possibility that the jackpot game is executed (that is, the jackpot reliability as the possibility that the hit notification effect is executed in the look-ahead target variation) is the first degree. It is an effect, and in the present embodiment, it is configured as an effect of changing the above-mentioned daytime background into a background image (evening background) showing an evening state of a certain place. On the other hand, the high reliability suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the second degree than the first degree, and in the present embodiment, the above daytime background is used. It is configured as a production that changes to a background image (night background) that shows the state of the night at a certain place.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pre-judgment result related to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-reading target variation is "big hit", the first operation-corresponding effect is always executed, and the reliability is high. The suggestion effect is configured to be executed with a higher probability than the low reliability suggestion effect. Further, the pre-judgment result related to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-reading target variation is "missing", and the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified by the pre-determination process is a variation of less than a predetermined time. In the case of a pattern, the first operation-corresponding effect may be executed, but the execution probability is set to an extremely low value. In addition, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol specified by the pre-judgment processing is determined in both the case where the pre-judgment result related to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the look-ahead target variation is "big hit" and the case where the pre-judgment result is a loss. When the fluctuation time is a fluctuation pattern of a predetermined time or more, the low reliability suggestion effect or the high reliability suggestion effect is executed, and the longer the fluctuation time, the lower the execution probability of the low reliability suggestion effect. It is configured to increase the execution probability of the high reliability suggestion effect.

Since such a configuration is adopted for the first operation-corresponding effect, the case where the high-reliability suggestion effect is executed is a certain place as compared with the case where the low-reliability suggestion effect is executed. As the appearance of is darker, the reliability of the jackpot becomes higher. Therefore, the player can easily and sensuously recognize that the darker the appearance of a certain place, the more the expectation of a big hit can be expected.

If it is preset not to execute the first operation-corresponding effect based on the pre-judgment result related to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-reading target variation, the valid period related to the first operation promotion effect. Regardless of whether or not the first effect button 35 is operated, the low reliability suggestion effect and the high reliability suggestion effect are not executed. On the other hand, it is preset to execute a low reliability suggestion effect or a high reliability suggestion effect as the first operation corresponding effect based on the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the look-ahead target variation. If the valid period related to the first operation promotion effect ends without the operation of the first effect button 35, a preset reliability suggestion effect is executed at the timing when the valid period ends. Will be.

However, it is not always the case that the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period related to the first operation promotion effect in a state in which it is preset to execute the low reliability suggestion effect or the high reliability suggestion effect. It is not necessary to execute the reliability suggestion effect, and if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period related to the first operation promotion effect, the low reliability suggestion effect or the high reliability suggestion effect is executed. Even if is preset, the reliability suggestion effect may not be executed.

Up to this point, the effect performed by the first pre-target variation has been described, but when the first operation promotion effect is executed in the first pre-target variation, the low reliability suggestion effect (see FIG. 26C) is executed. There are times when the high reliability suggestion effect is executed, times when the high reliability suggestion effect is executed, and times when neither of these reliability suggestion effects is executed. Further, as described above, the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the look-ahead target variation is "missing", and the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified by the pre-determination process has a variation time of a predetermined time. If the fluctuation pattern is less than, the first operation promotion effect (see FIG. 26 (B)), the low reliability suggestion effect (see FIG. 26 (C)), and the high reliability suggestion effect (see FIG. 26 (D)). ) May not be executed and the second pre-target variation may be started.

(Direction in the second pre-target fluctuation)
When the first pre-target fluctuation is completed, the first special symbol indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination executed at the start of the first pre-target fluctuation is a loss is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41. Along with this, on the display screen 70, three effect symbols indicating the disparity are finally stopped. Then, when a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the second pre-target variation (an example of "second variation display"). The next first special symbol and the effect symbol as a variable display are started (see FIG. 26 (E)).

When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the second pre-target variation, the second operation promotion effect (an example of "second input promotion notification") may be executed (see FIG. 26 (F)). This second operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 35, and is the same effect as the first operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 26 (B).

When the player operates the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the second operation promotion effect, the second operation-compatible effect corresponding to the operation of the first effect button 35 ("second input-compatible effect"). As an example), there is a case where a weak symbol change effect (see FIG. 26 (G)) is executed, a case where a strong symbol change effect (see FIG. 26 (H)) is executed, or these symbol change effects. There are cases where it is not executed.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the three symbol sequences are all the symbol sequences in which nine effect symbols of 1 symbol to 9 symbols are continuously written in the vertical direction from the bottom to the top. In the effect symbol display area 73, each symbol sequence is variably displayed so that some of the effect symbols constituting these symbol sequences can be visually recognized. Here, the following effect symbols may be displayed as the above 1 symbols to 9 symbols.

That is, the effect symbol display area 73 includes one symbol having the number "1" and the character A in the normal display mode, and the character B having the number "2" and the normal display mode. 2 symbols to be formed, 3 symbols composed of the number "3" and the character C in the normal display mode, and 4 symbols composed of the number "4" and the character D in the normal display mode. , 5 symbols composed of the number "5" and the character E in the normal display mode, 6 symbols composed of the number "6" and the character F in the normal display mode, and the numbers. Seven symbols composed of "7" and the character G in the normal display mode, eight symbols composed of the number "8" and the character H in the normal display mode, the number "9" and Nine symbols configured with the character I in the normal display mode are displayed.

When the second operation promotion effect illustrated in FIG. 26F is executed, the scroll display of each symbol sequence is performed until the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the second operation promotion effect. Along with this, the effect symbols composed of numbers and characters in the normal display mode are sequentially displayed in the effect symbol display area 73. On the other hand, when a weak symbol change effect or a strong symbol change effect is executed as a second operation-corresponding effect corresponding to the operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period, the display modes of 1 to 9 symbols are displayed. Changes.

Here, when a weak symbol change effect (see FIG. 26 (G)) is executed as the second operation-corresponding effect, the display mode of the character A is normally displayed while the number "1" constituting one symbol is left as it is. The mode changes from the mode to the weak display mode, the display mode of the character B changes from the normal display mode to the weak display mode while the number "2" constituting the 2 symbols remains unchanged, and the number "3" constituting the 3 symbols changes. The display mode of the character C changes from the normal display mode to the weak display mode, and the display mode of the character D changes from the normal display mode to the weak display mode while keeping the number "4" constituting the four symbols. The display mode of the character E changes from the normal display mode to the weak display mode while keeping the number "5" constituting the 5 symbols. Further, the display mode of the character F changes from the normal display mode to the weak display mode while the number "6" constituting the 6 symbols remains unchanged, and the display mode of the character G remains unchanged from the number "7" constituting the 7 symbols. The mode changes from the normal display mode to the weak display mode, and the display mode of the character H changes from the normal display mode to the weak display mode while keeping the number "8" constituting the 8 symbols, and constitutes 9 symbols. The display mode of the character I changes from the normal display mode to the weak display mode while keeping the number "9" as it is.

On the other hand, when the strong symbol change effect (see FIG. 26 (H)) is executed as the second operation-corresponding effect, the display mode of the character A is the normal display mode while the number "1" constituting one symbol is left as it is. The display mode of the character B changes from the normal display mode to the strong display mode while the number "2" constituting the 2 symbols remains unchanged, and the number "3" constituting the 3 symbols changes from. The display mode of the character C changes from the normal display mode to the strong display mode as it is, and the display mode of the character D changes from the normal display mode to the strong display mode while keeping the number "4" constituting the four symbols. Then, the display mode of the character E changes from the normal display mode to the strong display mode while keeping the number "5" constituting the 5 symbols as it is. Further, the display mode of the character F changes from the normal display mode to the strong display mode while the number "6" constituting the 6 symbols remains unchanged, and the display mode of the character G remains unchanged from the number "7" constituting the 7 symbols. The mode changes from the normal display mode to the strong display mode, and the display mode of the character H changes from the normal display mode to the strong display mode while keeping the number "8" constituting the 8 symbols, and constitutes 9 symbols. The display mode of the character I changes from the normal display mode to the strong display mode while keeping the number "9" as it is.

The character in the weak display mode represents a character in which the character in the normal display mode is stronger, and the character in the strong display mode represents a character in which the character in the weak display mode is stronger than the character in the weak display mode.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pre-judgment result related to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-reading target variation is "big hit", the second operation-corresponding effect is always executed and the strong symbol changes. The production is configured to be executed with a higher probability than the weak symbol change production. Further, the pre-judgment result related to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-reading target variation is "missing", and the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified by the pre-determination process is a variation of less than a predetermined time. In the case of a pattern, the second operation-corresponding effect may be executed, but the execution probability is set to an extremely low value. In addition, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol specified by the pre-judgment processing is determined in both the case where the pre-judgment result related to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the look-ahead target variation is "big hit" and the case where the pre-judgment result is a loss. When the fluctuation time is a fluctuation pattern of a predetermined time or more, the weak symbol change effect or the strong symbol change effect is executed, and the longer the fluctuation time, the lower the execution probability of the weak symbol change effect, and conversely, the strong symbol change. It is configured to increase the execution probability of the effect.

Since such a configuration is adopted for the second operation-corresponding effect, each effect symbol is displayed in the case where the strong symbol change effect is executed as compared with the case where the weak symbol change effect is executed. As the constituent characters become stronger, the jackpot reliability becomes higher. Therefore, the player can easily and sensuously recognize that the stronger the character constituting each effect symbol, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

If it is preset not to execute the second operation-corresponding effect based on the pre-judgment result related to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-reading target variation, the valid period related to the second operation promotion effect. Regardless of whether or not the first effect button 35 is operated, the weak symbol change effect and the strong symbol change effect are not executed. On the other hand, when it is preset to execute a weak symbol change effect or a strong symbol change effect as the second operation corresponding effect based on the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the look-ahead target variation. In the above, when the valid period related to the second operation promotion effect ends without the operation of the first effect button 35, the preset symbol change effect is executed at the timing when the valid period ends. Become.

However, if it is preset to execute the weak symbol change effect or the strong symbol change effect and the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period related to the second operation promotion effect, the symbol change is not necessarily performed. It is not necessary to execute the effect, and if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period related to the second operation promotion effect, it is preset to execute the weak symbol change effect or the strong symbol change effect. Even so, the symbol change effect may not be executed.

Up to this point, the effect performed by the second pre-target variation has been described, but when the second operation promotion effect is executed in the second pre-target variation, the weak symbol change effect (see FIG. 26 (G)) is executed. There are times when a strong symbol change effect (see FIG. 26 (H)) is executed, and there are times when neither of these symbol change effects is executed. Further, as described above, the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-reading target variation is "missing", and the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified by the pre-determination process has a variation time of a predetermined time. If the fluctuation pattern is less than, the second operation promotion effect (see FIG. 26 (F)), the weak symbol change effect (see FIG. 26 (G)), and the strong symbol change effect (see FIG. 26 (H)) are performed. The look-ahead target variation may be started without being executed.

(Direction in change of look-ahead target)
When the second pre-target fluctuation is completed, the first special symbol indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination executed at the start of the second pre-target fluctuation is a loss is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41. Along with this, on the display screen 70, three effect symbols indicating the disparity are finally stopped. Then, when a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the next first special symbol and the effect symbol change as the look-ahead target variation. The display is started (see FIG. 26 (I)).

The flow of the production in this look-ahead target change is as follows. That is, there is a case where the reach-less effect is performed without the reach being established during the execution of the look-ahead target variation, and the loss notification effect is executed (see FIGS. 26 (I) and 26 (L)). Further, there is a case where a reach is established and a low reliability reach (for example, a normal reach) is performed during the execution of the look-ahead target variation, and a winning notification effect is executed without developing into a high reliability reach (FIG. 26). (I), (J), and (L)). In addition, a reach is established during execution of the look-ahead target variation, and develops into a high-reliability reach (for example, SP reach or SPSP reach) via a low-reliability reach (or without going through a low-reliability reach). However, the winning notification effect may be executed in the high reliability reach (see FIGS. 26 (I), (J), (K), and (L)).

(About various execution probabilities)
Up to this point, with reference to FIG. 26, the flow of the effect in the first pre-target variation, the flow of the effect in the second pre-object variation, and the flow of the effect in the look-ahead target variation have been described. In 1, based on the result of the pre-judgment processing relating to the right of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the pre-reading target change, what kind of flow is performed in the first pre-target change and the second pre-target change. That is, the effect patterns of the effects in the first pre-target variation and the second pre-object variation are set, and the effects in these pre-target variations proceed in a flow corresponding to the set variation patterns.

In the sub ROM 92, as a table for selecting the effect pattern of the look-ahead button effect illustrated in FIG. 26, a look-ahead button effect pattern selection table for jackpot, a look-ahead button effect pattern selection table for reach loss, and a look-ahead for loss without reach The button effect pattern selection table and is stored. When the sub CPU 91 executes the look-ahead button effect using the first pre-target variation and the second pre-object variation, any one of these three tables is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93, and the set selection table is set. Refer to it and select the effect pattern of the look-ahead button effect.

Specifically, the sub CPU 91 has specified that the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the look-ahead target change is a "big hit" based on the advance determination result (pre-judgment information) related to the look-ahead target change. In this case, the jackpot look-ahead button effect pattern selection table is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93. In addition, based on the pre-judgment result (pre-judgment information) related to the pre-reading target variation, the judgment result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-reading target variation becomes "missing", and the reach effect is executed by the pre-reading target variation. When it is specified that the fact is specified, the read-ahead button effect pattern selection table for reach loss is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93. In addition, based on the pre-judgment result (pre-judgment information) related to the look-ahead target change, the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the look-ahead target change becomes "missing", and the pre-reading target change causes no reach. When it is specified that the table is to be read, the read-ahead button effect pattern selection table for loss without reach is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93.

Here, the jackpot look-ahead button effect pattern selection table is used for the look-ahead button effect when a determination result indicating "big hit" is obtained as a preliminary determination result relating to the right of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the change in the look-ahead target. This is a table that is referred to when selecting an effect pattern. The look-ahead button effect pattern selection table for reach loss was "missing" as a preliminary judgment result relating to the right of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the change in the look-ahead target, and a judgment result indicating that the reach effect was executed was obtained. In this case, it is a table that is referred to when selecting the effect pattern of the look-ahead button effect. The look-ahead button effect pattern selection table for non-reach loss has a determination result of "loss" as a preliminary determination result relating to the right of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the change in the look-ahead target, and a determination result indicating that the reach-less effect is executed. When obtained, it is a table that is referred to when selecting the effect pattern of the look-ahead button effect.

In these look-ahead button effect pattern selection tables, the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the effect pattern of the look-ahead button effect in the first pre-target variation and the second pre-target variation, and the disorder. It is associated with a numerical value. When selecting the effect pattern of the look-ahead button effect, the sub CPU 91 acquires a look-ahead button effect random number for selecting the effect pattern. Then, the determination result of the first special symbol determination specified by the pre-judgment information corresponding to the pre-reading target variation acquired from the main control board 80, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol also specified by the pre-determination information are acquired. By reading the effect pattern corresponding to the read-ahead button effect random number from the look-ahead button effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93, one effect pattern of the look-ahead button effect is selected.

In these look-ahead button effect pattern selection tables, the number of random values associated with each effect pattern is set to an appropriate number, so that the execution probabilities of each effect that constitutes the look-ahead button effect are as follows. It has become like.

That is, with respect to the second operation promotion effect (see FIG. 26E), the execution probability of the second operation promotion effect when the reliability suggestion effect (low reliability suggestion effect or high reliability suggestion effect) is not passed is about. It is set to 3%. That is, if the low-reliability suggestion effect or the high-reliability suggestion effect is not executed as the first operation-corresponding effect, the probability that the second operation promotion effect is executed after that is only about 3%, which is usually the case. , The second pre-target variation ends without the second operation promotion effect being executed.

Further, the execution probability of the second operation promotion effect when passing through the low reliability suggestion effect (see FIG. 26C) is set to about 20%. That is, when the low reliability suggestion effect is executed as the first operation-corresponding effect, the second operation promotion effect is executed with a probability of about 20% thereafter, as compared with the case where the reliability suggestion effect is not executed. Then, the second operation promotion effect is executed with high probability. Further, the execution probability of the second operation promotion effect when passing through the high reliability suggestion effect (see FIG. 26 (D)) is set to about 70%. That is, when the high reliability suggestion effect is executed as the first operation corresponding effect, the second operation promotion effect is executed with a probability of about 70% thereafter, and the reliability suggestion effect is not executed, or The second operation promotion effect is executed with a considerably higher probability than when the low reliability suggestion effect is executed.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the high reliability suggestion effect (an example of the "second possibility suggestion effect") is executed, the low reliability suggestion effect ("first possibility suggestion effect") is executed. The second operation promotion effect is executed with a higher probability than the case where the "suggestion effect" is executed).

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, depending on the effect pattern of the look-ahead button effect selected by the sub CPU 91, the second operation-corresponding effect is executed after the high reliability suggestion effect (see FIG. 26 (D)). In this case, as the second operation-corresponding effect, a strong symbol change effect (see FIG. 26 (H)) may be executed. This strong symbol change effect is an effect that suggests that the jackpot game is more likely to be executed than the high reliability suggestion effect. That is, the jackpot reliability of the strong symbol change effect is set to a value higher than the jackpot reliability of the high reliability suggestion effect. The execution probability of such a strong symbol change effect has the following characteristics.

That is, the probability that the strong symbol change effect (an example of "third possibility suggestion effect") is executed without going through the reliability suggestion effect is set to about 2%, and the low reliability suggestion effect and the high reliability are set. If neither of the degree suggestion effects is executed, the probability that the symbol change effect is not executed after the second operation promotion effect, or even if it is executed, the weak symbol change effect is executed becomes extremely high. There is.

In addition, when the low reliability suggestion effect (see FIG. 26 (C)) is passed, the strong symbol change effect (see FIG. 26 (H)) is executed with a probability of about 15%, and the high reliability suggestion effect is passed. If this is the case, the strong symbol change effect is executed with a probability of about 55%. As described above, it is easier to execute the strong symbol change effect by passing through the high reliability suggestion effect than by passing through the low reliability suggestion effect.

In addition, the probability of developing a high-reliability reach (see FIG. 26 (K)) due to the look-ahead target variation performed after the first pre-target variation and the second pre-object variation has the following characteristics. That is, if the probability of finally developing to a high reliability reach is set to about 3% without going through the symbol change effect, and neither the weak symbol change effect nor the strong symbol change effect is executed. , After the look-ahead target change is started, the loss notification effect is executed without the reach effect being performed, or the low reliability reach is executed without developing into the high reliability reach even if the reach is established. The probability that the winning notification effect (hit notification effect or loss notification effect) is executed is extremely high.

In addition, when passing through a weak symbol change effect (see FIG. 26 (G)), it develops into a highly reliable reach with a probability of about 10%, and when passing through a strong symbol change effect (see FIG. 26 (H)). Will develop into a highly reliable reach with a probability of about 95%. In this way, it is easier to eventually develop into a high-reliability reach due to the change in the look-ahead target, and it develops into a high-reliability reach by going through the strong symbol change effect rather than via the weak symbol change effect. Therefore, there is a higher possibility that the hit notification effect will be executed as compared with the case where only the low reliability reach is executed.

In this way, when the series of look-ahead button effects illustrated in FIG. 26 is executed, the high reliability reach is developed with a high probability when the strong symbol change effect (see FIG. 26 (H)) is executed. , The strong symbol change effect is most easily executed when the high reliability suggestion effect is used. Therefore, the player promotes the first operation while expecting that the high reliability suggestion effect is executed as the first operation-compatible effect and the strong symbol change effect is executed as the second operation-compatible effect. The first effect button 35 can be operated for the effect (and the second operation promotion effect), and a high effect can be obtained.

(About the gaming machine 1 that can execute the look-ahead button effect)
Up to this point, the flow and execution probability of various effects constituting the look-ahead button effect have been described with reference to FIG. 26. However, the gaming machine 1 capable of executing such a look-ahead button effect is the following gaming machine. Can be understood as.

Input means that can be input by the player (for example, the first effect button 35) and
With a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 31 described later: see FIG. 5). ,
When the determination is made, the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is variablely displayed on the predetermined symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display 41), and then the special symbol indicating the result of the determination is stopped. The symbol display control means to be displayed (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 28) and
When the special symbol indicating that the determination is made by the determination means when the special game is executed is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, the special game execution means for executing the special game (for example, in step S6 of FIG. 28). Main CPU81) that executes the opening / closing control process of the winning opening, and
A production control means for controlling the production (for example, sub CPU 91: see FIG. 5) is provided.
The effect control means
The effect symbol is variablely displayed according to the variable display of the special symbol, and the effect symbol indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed along with the stop display of the special symbol.
During the first variation display of the effect symbol (for example, during the execution of the first pre-target variation: see FIG. 26), the first input promotion notification (for example, the first operation promotion) prompting the player to input to the input means. The effect: (see FIG. 26B) is executed, and the first input corresponding effect (for example, low reliability suggestion effect or high reliability suggestion effect: FIG. 26C and (D)) is executed according to the input to the input means. The first effect control that executes (see) and
A second prompting the player to input to the input means during the second variation display of the effect symbol (for example, during the execution of the second pre-target variation: see FIG. 26), which is performed after the first variation display. The input promotion notification (for example, the second operation promotion effect) is executed (see FIG. 26F), and the second input corresponding effect (for example, the weak symbol change effect or the strong symbol change effect: FIG. It is possible to execute the second effect control that executes (see 26 (G) and (H)).
In the first input corresponding effect, the first possibility suggestion effect suggesting that the possibility that the special game is executed is the first degree (for example, low reliability suggestion effect: see FIG. 26C). ) And a second possibility suggestion effect (see FIG. 26 (D)) that suggests that the possibility is a second degree higher than the first degree.
The effect control means
The case of executing the second possibility suggestion effect has a higher probability than the case of executing the first possibility suggestion effect (for example, the second operation promotion effect: FIG. 26 (). A gaming machine characterized in that it executes (see F)).

According to this gaming machine, the second input promotion notification is executed with a higher probability when the second possibility suggestion effect is executed than when the first possibility suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, by executing the second possibility suggestion effect, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the second input promotion notification is executed and obtain a high effect.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment capable of executing the look-ahead button effect can also be regarded as the following gaming machine.
The effect control means
When the second input corresponding effect (for example, the second operation corresponding effect) is executed after the second possibility suggestion effect (for example, high reliability suggestion effect: see FIG. 26 (D)), the second possibility is indicated. The third possibility suggestion effect (for example, strong symbol change effect: see FIG. 26 (H)) suggesting that the possibility is higher than the possibility suggestion effect can be executed as the second input corresponding effect. A gaming machine featuring.

According to this gaming machine, it is suggested that when the second input corresponding effect is executed after the second possibility suggestion effect, there is a higher possibility (the special game is executed) than the second possibility suggestion effect. A third possibility suggestion effect (for example, a strong symbol change effect: see FIG. 26 (H)) can be executed as a second input corresponding effect. Therefore, the player who expects the special game to be executed can be given a strong motivation for inputting to the second input promotion notification, and the second possibility suggestion effect (for example, the second possibility suggestion effect) can be given. By the synergistic effect of the high reliability suggestion effect) and the third possibility suggestion effect (for example, the strong symbol change effect), it is possible to effectively improve the expectation of the player and obtain a high effect.

(Other configurations related to look-ahead button production)
Regarding the look-ahead button effect, the following configuration may be adopted.
That is, in the present embodiment, the "first possibility suggestion effect" is a low reliability suggestion effect that changes the daytime background to the evening background, and the "second possibility suggestion effect" is a high degree that changes the daytime background to the night background. The case of the reliability suggestion effect will be described as an example, but as long as it suggests that the second possibility suggestion effect is more likely to execute the jackpot game than the first possibility suggestion effect. , These possibility suggestion effects may be different from the low reliability suggestion effect and the high reliability suggestion effect illustrated in the present embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the weak symbol change effect or the strong symbol change effect (an example of the third possibility suggestion effect) is executed as the second input corresponding effect has been described as an example, but the third possibility suggestion has been described. The third possibility suggestion effect is different from the strong symbol change effect as long as the jackpot game is more likely to be executed when the effect is executed than the second possibility suggestion effect is executed. It may be an effect, or as a second input corresponding effect, an effect different from the weak symbol change effect may be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a weak symbol change effect (see FIG. 26 (G)) can be executed as the second operation-corresponding effect, but this weak symbol change effect is a highly reliable suggestion effect (FIG. 26 (D). ) May be a production with a lower jackpot reliability than), or may be a production with a higher jackpot reliability than a high reliability suggestion production. However, if the weak symbol change effect has a lower jackpot reliability than the high reliability suggestion effect, the weak symbol change effect (which has a lower jackpot reliability) is executed after the high reliability suggestion effect. , It is conceivable that the player's expectation for the jackpot will be lowered. Therefore, if the weak symbol change effect is a production with a lower jackpot reliability than the high reliability suggestion effect, the weak symbol change effect is not executed after the high reliability suggestion effect is executed, and the strong symbol change effect is performed. It is conceivable to make sure that it is executed to suppress the decrease in the player's expectation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect that can be executed as the first operation-corresponding effect with respect to the first operation promotion effect (see FIG. 26B) is the low reliability exemplified in FIGS. 26 (C) and 26 (D). Although the case where there are two of the suggestion effect and the high reliability suggestion effect will be described as an example, a configuration may be adopted in which any one of three or more first operation-corresponding effects is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect that can be executed as the second operation-corresponding effect with respect to the second operation promotion effect (see FIG. 26 (F)) is the weak symbol change exemplified in FIGS. 26 (G) and (H). Although the case where there are two of the effect and the strong symbol change effect will be described as an example, a configuration in which any one of three or more second operation-compatible effects may be executed may be adopted.

When such a configuration is adopted, among the three or more second operation-compatible effects, the second operation-compatible effect and the jackpot reliability, which have a lower jackpot reliability than the first operation-compatible effect executed earlier, are used. If a high-degree operation-corresponding effect is included, a second operation having a lower jackpot reliability than the first operation-corresponding effect executed earlier for the purpose of suppressing a decrease in the player's expectation. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the corresponding effect is not executed and the second operation-corresponding effect, which has a higher jackpot reliability than the first operation-corresponding effect executed earlier, is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the "first variation display" is the first pre-target variation and the "second variation display" is the second pre-object variation will be described as an example. The "variation display" and the "second variation display" are not limited to the first pre-target variation and the second pre-target variation. For example, the "first variation display" is the second pre-object variation. The "second variation display" may be the look-ahead target variation. That is, instead of using the first pre-object variation, the pre-read button effect described with reference to FIG. 26 may be executed by using the second pre-object variation and the look-ahead target variation.

Hereinafter, the RAM configuration of each control board for realizing the game control and the effect control described based on the drawings up to FIG. 26, and the processing performed on each control board will be described.

[Configuration example of main RAM 83]
FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area of the main RAM 83 and the information stored in each storage area. As illustrated in FIG. 27 (A), the main RAM 83 has a determination storage area 830 as a storage area for storing acquired information or the like acquired when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 21. 1st and 1st reserved storage areas 831, 1st and 2nd reserved storage areas 832, 1st and 3rd reserved storage areas 833, and 1st and 4th reserved storage areas 834 are provided. Further, in the main RAM 83, as storage areas for storing the acquired information and the like acquired when the game ball wins in the second starting port 22, the determination storage area 830 and the special figure 2 / first reserved storage area 835 are stored. , Special Figure 2 and 2nd Hold Storage Area 836, Special Figure 2 and 3rd Hold Storage Area 837, and Special Figure 2 and 4 Hold Storage Area 838 are provided.

The determination storage area 830 is a storage area in which various information used for the special symbol determination is stored when the special symbol determination is actually executed. The special figure 1 / 1st reserved storage area 831 to the special figure 1 / 4th reserved storage area 834 is a storage area for storing various information related to the 1st special symbol determination, and the special figure 2 / 1st reserved storage area. The 835-special figure 2/4 reserved storage area 838 is a storage area in which various information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. Then, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are suspended, the second special symbol determination is preferentially digested over the first special symbol determination. Therefore, in the determination storage area 830, when the reserved special symbol determination is executed, if the second special symbol determination is suspended, it is stored in the special figure 2 and the first reserved storage area 835. When various information is shifted and only the first special symbol determination is reserved, the various information stored in the special figure 1 / first reserved storage area 831 is shifted.

As illustrated in FIG. 27 (B), the reserved storage areas 831 to 838 are areas for storing information for holding the right of special symbol determination, and each is a jackpot random number acquired by the main CPU 81. It includes an area for storing a symbol random number, an area for storing a reach random number, an area for storing a variation pattern random number, an area for storing pre-judgment information which is information indicating a pre-judgment result, and the like.

Here, the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are as described above. The pre-determination information is information obtained by a pre-determination process (see FIG. 30) described later based on a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number. The pre-judgment information is, specifically, winning start information, information indicating whether or not the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is a big hit, and if it is a big hit, information indicating what kind of big hit it is. It includes information indicating a variation pattern of a special symbol, information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. Here, the winning start opening information is acquired when the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number stored in the same hold storage area are won by the game ball in the first starting opening 21. This is information indicating whether or not the game ball was acquired when the game ball won a prize in the second starting port 22. The pre-determination information including this information is stored in the same reserved storage area as the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number used in the pre-determination process.

In the game machine 1, each time a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 21, the five pieces of information explained based on FIG. 27 (B) are displayed in order from the special figure 1 and the first reserved storage area 831. -It is stored in one of the first reserved storage area 831 to the special figure 1 and the fourth reserved storage area 834. In addition, each time the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 22, the above five pieces of information are displayed in the order of the special figure 2 and the first reserved storage area 835, in the order of the special figure 2 and the first reserved storage area 835 to the special figure 2. It is stored in any of the fourth reserved storage areas 838.

For example, in a state where the information is stored in the determination storage area 830 and the information is not stored in any of the special figure 1 and the first reserved storage area 831 to the special figure 1 and the fourth reserved storage area 834, the first When the game ball wins the starting port 21, five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination newly acquired in response to the winning are stored in the special figure 1 and the first reserved storage area 831. Further, for example, the first start port 21 has five pieces of information stored in each of the determination storage area 830, the special figure 1 / first reserved storage area 831, and the special figure 1/2 reserved storage area 832. When the game ball wins a prize, five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination newly acquired according to the winning are stored in the special figure 1 and 3 reserved storage areas 833.

Further, when the information stored in the special figure 1 / 1st reserved storage area 831 is shifted to the determination storage area 830 when the first special symbol determination is executed, the special figure 1 / 2nd reserved storage area 832 or later is performed. The information stored in the reserved storage area related to the first special symbol determination is shifted to the special figure 1 / first reserved storage area 831 side. For example, the information stored in the special figure 1 and the first reserved storage area 831 is stored in the state where the information is stored in each of the special figure 1 and the first reserved storage area 831 to the special figure 1 and the third reserved storage area 833. When the determination storage area 830 is shifted, the information stored in the special figure 1/2 reserved storage area 832 is shifted to the special figure 1/1 reserved storage area 831, and the special figure 1/3 reserved storage area is shifted. The information stored in the area 833 is shifted to the special figure 1 and 2 reserved storage areas 832.

Such information shift processing is also performed in the special figure 2 / first reserved storage area 835 to the special figure 2 / 4th reserved storage area 838 in which the information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are reserved, that is, the special figure 1 / first reserved storage area 831 and the special figure 2 / 1st reserved When information is stored in both of the storage areas 835, the special figures 2 and 1 are prior to the shift processing for the special figures 1 and 1 reserved storage areas 831 to the special figures 1 and 4 reserved storage areas 834. 1 The shift process for the reserved storage area 835 to the special figure 2 and the fourth reserved storage area 838 is prioritized.

By the way, even if a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 21 or the second starting port 22 and various random numbers are acquired during the variable display of the special symbol or the jackpot game, the special symbol determination and the variable display of the special symbol are displayed. It cannot be done immediately. Therefore, when various random numbers are acquired under such a situation, the main CPU 81 uses the acquired various random numbers and the like as information for holding the right to determine the special symbol in the reserved storage area 831. It is supposed to be stored in any of the areas of ~ 838. On the other hand, when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol determination is not held, and the jackpot game is not in progress, the main CPU 81 receives various random numbers and the like acquired when the start opening prize is won. It is stored directly in the determination storage area 830.

[Interrupt processing by the main control board 80]
Next, the interrupt processing executed on the main control board 80 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. Here, FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed on the main control board 80. The main control board 80 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 28 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. .. The processing of the main control board 80 described based on the flowcharts of FIGS. 28 and 28 is performed according to the instructions issued by the main CPU 81 based on the program stored in the main ROM 82.

First, the main CPU 81 executes a random number update process for updating various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, a variable pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number (step S1). The jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable pattern random number, and the normal symbol random number are added by "1" each time the process of step S1 is performed. A loop counter is used as the counter that performs the process of step S1, and each random number is returned to "0" and updated after reaching a preset maximum value.

Following the process of step S1, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers according to the input of the detection signals from the first start port sensor 211, the second start port sensor 221 and the gate sensor 251. The sensor detection process including the process is executed (step S2). This sensor detection process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 29.

Following the process of step S2, the main CPU 81 executes the special symbol determination to cause the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and then the determination result of the special symbol determination. A special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying the special symbol indicating the above is executed (step S3). This special symbol processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 31.

Following the process of step S3, the main CPU 81 executes a normal symbol determination, causes the normal symbol display 43 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Normal symbol processing is executed (step S4).

Following the process of step S4, the main CPU 81 controls the second start port solenoid 222 to operate the opening / closing member 23 when it is determined that the second start port 22 is to be opened as a result of the normal symbol determination. 2 The second starting port opening / closing control process for opening / closing the starting port 22 is executed (step S5).

Following the process of step S5, when the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot is a "big hit" in the jackpot determination process executed in the special symbol process of step S3, the first big prize opening solenoid 262 (or the second big prize) The large winning opening opening / closing control process for opening / closing the first large winning opening 26 (or the second large winning opening 28) is executed by controlling the mouth solenoid 282) (step S6). The opening / closing control process for the large winning opening will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37.

Following the process of step S6, the main CPU 81 executes a prize ball process for controlling the payout of the prize ball according to the winning of the game ball (step S7).

Following the processing in step S7, the main CPU 81 transmits to the sub-control board 90 information necessary for determining various commands and effect contents set (stored) in the main RAM 83 in the processing steps prior to step S7. The process is executed (step S8).

[Sensor detection processing by the main control board 80]
FIG. 29 is a detailed flowchart of the sensor detection process in step S2 of FIG. 28. As illustrated in FIG. 29, the main CPU 81 causes the gate sensor 251 to pass the game ball to the gate 25 based on the presence / absence of the input of the detection signal from the gate sensor 251 following the random number update process in step S1. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (step S201). Here, when it is determined that the gate sensor 251 has detected the passage of the game ball through the gate 25 (step S201: YES), the hold number F for the normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is set in advance. It is determined whether or not it is less than the maximum number of pending symbols Fmax (“4” in this embodiment) for symbol determination (step S202).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the hold number F is less than "4" (step S202: YES), the main CPU 81 updates the hold number F to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S203), and the random number update process in step S1 is performed. With respect to the ordinary symbol random number that is updated every time the random number is performed, the value of the timing at which the passage of the game ball to the gate 25 is detected is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S204).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S204 and determines that the gate sensor 251 has not detected the passage of the game ball to the gate 25 (step S201: NO), the hold number F is less than "4". If it is determined that this is not the case (step S202: NO), the second start port sensor 221 detects that the game ball has won the second start port 22 based on the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the second start port sensor 221. It is determined whether or not this has been done (step S206). Here, when it is determined that the second start port sensor 221 has detected the winning of the game ball with respect to the second start port 22 (step S206: YES), the number of hold numbers T2 for the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83. Is less than the preset maximum hold number T2max (“4” in the present embodiment) of the second special symbol determination (step S207).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the hold number T2 is less than "4" (step S207: YES), the main CPU 81 updates the hold number T2 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S208), and the random number update process in step S1 is performed. With respect to the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number that are updated each time the game is performed, the value of the timing at which the winning of the game ball with respect to the second starting port 22 is detected is acquired (step S209).

In this way, various random numbers related to the second special symbol determination are generated according to the establishment of the acquisition condition that the winning of the game ball for the second starting port 22 is detected when the holding number T2 is less than the maximum holding number T2max. To be acquired. When various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the second special symbol determination and the variation display of the second special symbol can be immediately executed, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830 and cannot be executed immediately. When various random numbers are acquired in the situation, these random numbers are stored in any of the special figure 2, the first reserved storage area 835, and the special figure 2, the fourth reserved storage area 838.

When the process of step S209 is executed, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state (step S210). The time saving game flag is stored in the main RAM 83. At this time, the time-saving game flag is set to "OFF" when controlling the operation of the opening / closing member 23 so that the game ball is in a low base state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win in the second start port 22, and the game ball is set in the second start port 22. Is a flag set to "ON" when controlling the operation of the opening / closing member 23 so as to be in a high base state in which is easy to win a prize. In step S210, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state based on whether or not the time saving game flag is set to “ON”.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is the high base state (step S210: YES), that is, when the time saving game flag is set to "ON", the pre-determination related to the hold of the second special symbol determination The process is executed (step S211). Specifically, the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 32) and the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 33), which will be described later, are executed based on various random numbers acquired in response to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 22. Based on the various random numbers acquired in the process of step S209, it is determined in advance whether or not it will be a big hit, and the change of the second special symbol when the second special symbol determination is executed. A pre-determination process is executed to predetermine which variation pattern is selected as the pattern. The pre-determination information that is the result of this pre-determination process is stored in the same reserved storage area in which the jackpot random numbers and the like used in the pre-determination process are stored.

If a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 22 while the number of pending numbers T2 for determining the second special symbol is "0", neither during the jackpot game nor during the variable display of the special symbol, the winning number is increased. The various acquired random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830, and the second special symbol determination based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, since the second special symbol determination is not suspended, the pre-determination process related to the second special symbol determination is not performed. Such a pre-determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S211 or determines that it is not in the high base state (step S210: NO), the main CPU 81 sets the hold command related to the second special symbol determination in the main RAM 83 (step S212). This hold command is a command for notifying that the second special symbol determination has been held, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. If the process of step S212 is performed without the pre-determination process of step S211 being performed, a hold command that does not include the pre-determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, when the process of step S212 is performed after the pre-determination process of step S211 is performed, a hold command including the pre-determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S212 and determines that the second start port sensor 221 has not detected the winning of the game ball for the second start port 22 (step S206: NO), the second When it is determined that the hold number T2 of the special symbol determination is not less than "4" (step S207: NO), the first start port sensor 211 is based on the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the first start port sensor 211. It is determined whether or not the winning of the game ball with respect to the first starting port 21 is detected (step S214). Here, when it is determined that the first start port sensor 211 has detected the winning of the game ball for the first start port 21 (step S214: YES), the number of hold numbers T1 for the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83. Is less than the preset maximum hold number T1max (“4” in the present embodiment) of the first special symbol determination (step S215).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the hold number T1 is less than "4" (step S215: YES), the main CPU 81 updates the hold number T1 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S216), and the random number update process in step S1 is performed. With respect to the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number that are updated each time the game is performed, the value of the timing at which the winning of the game ball with respect to the first starting port 21 is detected is acquired (step S217).

In this way, various random numbers related to the first special symbol determination are generated according to the establishment of the acquisition condition that the winning of the game ball for the first starting port 21 is detected when the holding number T1 is less than the maximum holding number T1max. To be acquired. When various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the first special symbol determination and the variation display of the first special symbol can be immediately executed, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830 and cannot be executed immediately. When various random numbers are acquired in the situation, these random numbers are stored in any of the special figure 1 and 1st reserved storage areas 831 to the special figure 1 and 4 reserved storage areas 834.

When the process of step S217 is executed, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state, as in the process of step S210 (step S218). Here, when it is determined that the current state is not the high base state (step S218: NO), that is, when the time saving game flag is set to "OFF", the pre-determination process relating to the suspension of the first special symbol determination Is executed (step S219). Specifically, the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 32) and the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 33), which will be described later, are executed based on various random numbers acquired in response to the winning of the game ball in the first start port 21. Based on various random numbers acquired in the process of step S217, it is determined in advance whether or not it will be a big hit, and when the first special symbol determination is executed, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is performed. A pre-determination process is executed to predetermine which variation pattern is selected as the pattern. The pre-determination information that is the result of this pre-determination process is stored in the same reserved storage area in which the jackpot random numbers and the like used in the pre-determination process are stored.

If the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 21 while the number of pending numbers T1 of the first special symbol determination is "0", neither during the jackpot game nor in the variable display of the special symbol, the winning number is increased. The various acquired random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830, and the first special symbol determination based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, since the first special symbol determination is not suspended, the pre-determination process related to the first special symbol determination is not performed. Such a pre-determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S219 or determines that it is in the high base state (step S218: YES), the main CPU 81 sets the hold command related to the first special symbol determination in the main RAM 83 (step S220). This hold command is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination has been held, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. If the process of step S220 is performed without performing the pre-determination process of step S219, a hold command that does not include the pre-determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, when the process of step S220 is performed after the pre-determination process of step S219 is performed, a hold command including the pre-determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

[Preliminary determination processing by the main control board 80]
Hereinafter, the pre-determination process executed by the main control board 80 will be described with reference to FIG. 30. Here, FIG. 30 is a detailed flowchart of the pre-determination process in steps S211, 219 of FIG. 29. Here, the pre-judgment process performed when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved will be described as an example, but the right to determine the second special symbol is different except that the random numbers and tables used are different. Is suspended, the same pre-judgment process is performed.

When the main CPU 81 determines in the process of step S210 of FIG. 29 that it is in the high base state (step S210: YES), or when it determines in the process of step S218 of FIG. 29 that it is not in the high base state (step S218: NO), the jackpot determination process is executed (step S2191). Specifically, in the case of a low probability state (in this embodiment, the "normal game state" and the "time saving game state" correspond to this), the jackpot random number table for the low probability time (see FIG. 6 (A)). Is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83. On the other hand, in the case of a high probability state (in this embodiment, the "probability variation game state" corresponds to this), the jackpot random number table for high probability (see FIG. 6A) is read from the main ROM 82 and stored in the main RAM 83. set. Then, whether or not the jackpot random number acquired in the process of step S209 of FIG. 29 (or the process of step S217 of FIG. 29) matches any of the winning values stored in the jackpot random number table set in the main RAM 83. Based on this, it is determined whether or not a jackpot will be determined at the start of the fluctuation.

Next, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not it is determined to be a big hit at the start of the fluctuation based on the determination result in step S2191 (step S2192). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is determined at the start of the fluctuation (step S2192: YES), the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIG. 9A) is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83. (Step S2193).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a big hit at the start of the fluctuation (step S2192: NO), it determines whether or not the reach effect is performed during the fluctuation (step S2194). Specifically, based on whether or not the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process in step S2191 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 82. It is determined whether or not the reach effect is performed during the fluctuation.

When it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed (step S2194: YES), the main CPU 81 reads the reach loss variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 9B) from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2195).

By the way, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "missing" and the reach effect is not performed during the fluctuation, the first special symbol is based on the number of pending first special symbol determinations at the start of the fluctuation. Fluctuation pattern is determined. This is as described above based on FIG. 9 (C). Then, the number of pending first special symbol determinations may differ between before and after the reserved first special symbol determination is digested. Therefore, the variation pattern of the special symbol acquired before the first special symbol determination is digested may be different from the variation pattern of the special symbol selected when the first special symbol determination is actually digested. is there. That is, for the right of the first special symbol determination in which the reach effect is not performed during the variation, it may not be possible to acquire an accurate variation pattern of the first special symbol prior to the first special symbol determination.

Therefore, when it is determined by the main CPU 81 that the reach effect is not performed (step S2194: NO), the variation pattern random number determination process of step S2196 described later and the process of storing the advance determination information of step S2197 are performed. The process proceeds to step S212 (or step S220) of FIG. 29 without any problems. Therefore, when the determination result of the special symbol determination becomes "missing" and the non-reach effect is performed, the hold command that does not include the advance determination information is set.

However, if a variable pattern that can be selected regardless of the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is prepared as a fluctuation pattern for loss without reach, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol selected at the start of the look-ahead target fluctuation is pre-determined. Can be identified by. Therefore, with respect to such a fluctuation pattern, it is possible to execute the process of step S2196 (process of specifying the fluctuation pattern selected at the start of the fluctuation) or the process of step S2197, which will be described later.

When the main CPU 81 sets the variable pattern selection table for jackpot or the variable pattern selection table for reach loss, the main CPU 81 executes the variable pattern random number determination process (step S2196). Specifically, the variation pattern random number acquired at the start opening winning along with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2191 is among the random number values defined in the variation pattern selection table set in the main RAM 83. Based on which random number value of the throat matches, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be selected in the special symbol determination performed at the start of the fluctuation is specified.

When the process of step S2196 is executed, the main CPU 81 generates pre-determination information and stores it in the main RAM 83 (step S2197). The area in which the pre-determination information is stored is as described above based on FIG. 27.

In this way, the main CPU 81 is based on the acquisition information such as the jackpot random number acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 21 (or the second start port 22), and the jackpot based on this acquisition information. Prior to the determination process and the variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern (that is, the variation time) of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is acquired.

[Special symbol processing by the main control board 80]
Next, the details of the special symbol processing executed by the main control board 80 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. Here, FIG. 31 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 28.

As illustrated in FIG. 31, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the jackpot game is in progress based on whether or not the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to “ON” ( Step S301). This jackpot game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, and is set to "ON" at the start of the jackpot game and set to "OFF" at the end of the jackpot game. Here, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol processing in step S4.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is not in progress (step S301: NO), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302). Here, when it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not the hold number T2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is "1" or more. (Step S303). Here, when it is determined that the hold number T2 is "1" or more (step S303: YES), the hold number T2 is updated to a value subtracted by "1" (step S304).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the hold number T2 is not "1" or more (step S303: NO), whether or not the hold number T1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is "1" or more. (Step S305). Here, when it is determined that the hold number T1 is "1" or more (step S305: YES), the hold number T1 is updated to a value subtracted by "1" (step S306).

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S304 or the process of step S306, the main CPU 81 executes a shift process for the reserved storage area of the main RAM 83 (step S307). Specifically, when the process of step S307 is executed following the process of step S304, the shift process of shifting the information stored in the special figure 2 first reserved storage area 835 to the determination storage area 830 is executed. To do. At that time, if information is also stored in the reserved storage areas after the special figure 2 and the second reserved storage area 836, the shift process for shifting the information to the special figure 2 and the first reserved storage area 835 side. Is also executed. On the other hand, when the shift process is executed following the process of step S306, the shift process for shifting the information stored in the first reserved storage area 831 of FIG. 1 to the determination storage area 830 is executed. At that time, if information is also stored in the reserved storage areas after the special figure 1 and 2 reserved storage areas 832, the shift process for shifting the information to the special figure 1 and 1 first reserved storage area 831 side. Is also executed.

When the main CPU 81 stores the information necessary for the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) such as the jackpot random number and the symbol random number by the shift process in step S307 in the determination storage area 830, the main CPU 81 is based on these information. , The jackpot determination process in step S308 and the variation pattern selection process in step S309 are executed.

It should be noted that the game ball is first started with the number of pending numbers T1 for the first special symbol determination and the number of pending numbers T2 for the second special symbol determination both being "0", neither during the jackpot game nor during the variable display of the special symbol. When a prize is won in the mouth 21 (or the second starting mouth 22), information such as a jackpot random number and a symbol random number acquired in response to the prize is directly stored in the determination storage area 830. In such a case, the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process are executed without executing the shift process in step S307.

The main CPU 81 executes the jackpot determination process based on the random numbers stored in the determination storage area 830 (step S308). By executing this jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot, and if it is determined to be a jackpot, the type of jackpot (big hit symbol) is determined. Then, the setting information of the special symbol indicating the result of these processes is set in the main RAM 83. This jackpot determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 32.

Following the jackpot determination process in step S308, the main CPU 81 executes a variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol (step S309). This fluctuation pattern selection process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 33.

Following the process of step S309, the main CPU 81 determines whether the special symbol setting information set in the process of step S308, the setting information of this special symbol is related to the first special symbol determination, or the second special symbol determination. A fluctuation start command including information indicating whether or not the above is related, information on setting the fluctuation pattern selected in the process of step S309, information on the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like is set in the main RAM 83 (step S310). This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, the variable effect including the variable display of the effect symbol on the display screen 70 is started.

Following the process of step S310, the main CPU 81 starts the variation display of the special symbol based on the variation pattern setting information included in the variation start command set in the process of step S310 (step S311). At that time, if the processes of steps S308 to S310 are performed with the information related to the first special symbol determination stored in the determination storage area 830, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 41 Starts the variable display of. On the other hand, when the processes of steps S308 to S310 are performed with the information related to the second special symbol determination stored in the determination storage area 830, the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 42 Start variable display.

Next, the main CPU 81 starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation display of the special symbol in step S311 (step S312). When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S312 or determines that the special symbol variation is being displayed (step S302: YES), the elapsed time when the measurement is started in the process of step S312 is the variation of step S309. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the pattern selection process has been reached (step S313). Here, when it is determined that the elapsed time has not reached the fluctuation time (step S313: NO), the process proceeds to the normal symbol processing in step S4.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the elapsed time has reached the variation time (step S313: YES), the main CPU 81 sets a variation end command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the variation display of the special symbol ends (step S314). This variation end command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, processing such as stopping and displaying the effect symbols that have been variablely displayed on the display screen 70 in a manner showing the determination result of the special symbol determination is performed.

Following the process of step S314, the main CPU 81 ends the variable display of the special symbol started in the process of step S311 (step S315). Specifically, the special symbol (big hit symbol or lost symbol) set in the process of step S308 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display that has been variable-displaying the special symbol. The stop display of this special symbol is continued until at least a predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed.

In this way, the main CPU 81 displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 in a variable manner, and then displays the special symbol (big hit symbol or lost symbol) indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process. The first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 is stopped and displayed.

Following the process of step S315, the main CPU 81 resets the elapsed time at which the measurement was started in the process of step S312 (step S316), and when the special figure is stopped including the process of starting the jackpot game when the jackpot is a big hit. The process is executed (step S317). This special figure stop processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 34.

[Big hit determination process by the main control board 80]
FIG. 32 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. First, the main CPU 81 executes a jackpot determination based on the jackpot random numbers stored in the determination storage area 830 (step S3081). Specifically, whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area 830 is a jackpot based on whether or not it matches a preset winning value (see FIG. 6A). judge. The winning value here is a jackpot winning value defined in the high-probability jackpot random number table or the low-probability jackpot random number table. When the jackpot determination is executed in the high probability state (in this embodiment, the "probability variation game state" corresponds to this), the winning value stored in the jackpot random number table for high probability is used. On the other hand, when the jackpot determination is executed in the low probability state (“normal game state” and “time saving game state” correspond to this in the present embodiment), it is stored in the jackpot random number table for low probability. The winning value is used.

In this way, the main CPU 81 starts such that the acquisition information such as the jackpot random number acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 21 or the second start port 22 is stored in the determination storage area 830. When the condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the jackpot random number.

Following the process of step S3081, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (step S3082). Here, when it is determined that the determination result of the jackpot determination is not "big hit" (step S3082: NO), that is, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the setting information of the losing symbol is set in the main RAM 83. (Step S3083). As a result, during the process of step S315, the lost symbol set here is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. In this case, the jackpot game is not performed.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (step S3082: YES), the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. The jackpot symbol selection process for selecting is executed (step S3084). Specifically, when the symbol random number stored in the determination storage area 830 together with the jackpot random number used for the jackpot determination in step S3081 is related to the first special symbol determination, the symbol random number is , One of the jackpot symbols is selected based on which jackpot symbol is matched with the random number value specified in the symbol determination table for winning the first start opening (see FIG. 6 (B)). In this case, any of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 exemplified in FIG. 6B is selected. In addition, when the symbol random number is related to the second special symbol determination, which jackpot symbol random number value specified in the symbol determination table for the second start opening winning is matched with the symbol random number. Based on, select one of the jackpot symbols. In this case, any of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y4 exemplified in FIG. 6C is selected.

Then, the main CPU 81 sets the setting information of the selected jackpot symbol in the main RAM 83 (step S3085). As a result, during the process of step S315, the jackpot symbol set here is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and then the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol. Will be done.

[Variation pattern selection process by main control board 80]
FIG. 33 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation pattern selection process in step S309 of FIG. After executing the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 31, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the determination result in step S3081 is a jackpot (step S3091). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S3091: YES), the jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 9A) is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3092).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3091: NO), the reach random number stored in the determination storage area 830 is the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 82 (for the effect with reach). Based on whether or not it matches with the corresponding random number value), it is determined whether or not to perform a reach effect that causes the player to expect a big hit (step S3093). Here, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed (step S3093: YES), the reach loss variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 9B) is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3094). On the contrary, when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (step S3093: NO), the variation pattern selection table for loss without reach (see FIG. 9C) is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3095). ..

The main CPU 81 executes the variation pattern random number determination process with reference to the variation pattern selection table set in the main RAM 83 by the process of step S3092, the process of step S3094, or the process of step S3095 (step S3096). Specifically, when the jackpot variation pattern selection table or the reach loss variation pattern selection table is set in the main RAM 83, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area 830 is set. One variation pattern is selected by reading from the variation pattern selection table. Further, when the variation pattern selection table for loss without reach is set in the main RAM 83, it is based on the hold number T1 of the first special symbol determination (or the hold number T2 of the second special symbol determination) stored in the main RAM 83. One variation pattern is selected by specifying the number of holds and reading the variation pattern corresponding to the specified number of holds from the variation pattern selection table for loss without reach. By selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in this way, the variation time of the special symbol is inevitably determined.

When the fluctuation pattern is selected, the main CPU 81 sets the setting information of the selected fluctuation pattern in the main RAM 83 (step S3097). The fluctuation pattern setting information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 together with the symbol setting information set in the main RAM 83 by the jackpot determination process in step S308 described above.

[Processing when the special figure is stopped by the main control board 80]
FIG. 34 is a detailed flowchart of the special figure stop processing in step S317 of FIG. 31. After resetting the elapsed time by the process of step S316, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a big hit, as in the process of step S3082 (see FIG. 32), as illustrated in FIG. 34 (step). S3171). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S3171: YES), the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S3172).

Next, the main CPU 81 sets the probability variation game flag stored in the main RAM 83 to “OFF” (step S3173), and sets the time saving game flag also stored in the main RAM 83 to “OFF” (step S3174). ). Here, the probability variation game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the special symbol determination is a relatively high probability state.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state is controlled by setting the probability variation gaming flag and the time saving gaming flag. That is, when the game state is controlled to the "probability change game state", both the probability change game flag and the time saving game flag are set to "ON". Further, when the game state is controlled to the "normal game state", both the probability variation game flag and the time saving game flag are set to "OFF". Further, when the game state is controlled to the "time saving game state", the probability variation game flag is set to "OFF" and the time saving game flag is set to "ON".

Following the process of step S3174, the main CPU 81 sets an opening command in the main RAM 83 for notifying that the jackpot game is started (step S3175). This opening command includes information such as the type of jackpot, the opening pattern of the first jackpot 26 (or the second jackpot 28 or V winning slot 287) during the jackpot game, and is the transmission process of step S8. Is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3171: NO), it determines whether or not the probability variation game flag is set to "ON" (step S3176). Here, when it is determined that the probability variation game flag is set to "ON" (step S3176: YES), that is, when the special symbol determination is performed in the high probability state, the high probability stored in the main RAM 83 is high. The remaining number of games K is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3177). The high-probability game remaining number K indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol determination is executed in the high-probability state.

Following the process of step S3177, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the high-probability game remaining number K is “0” (step S3178). Here, when it is determined that the high-probability game remaining number K is "0" (step S3178: YES), the probability variation game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3179). As a result, the special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S3179, when it is determined that the probability variation game flag is not set to "ON" (step S3176: NO), or the high probability game remaining number K is not "0". If it is determined (step S3178: NO), it is determined whether or not the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3180). Here, when it is determined that the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3180: YES), the time saving game remaining number J stored in the main RAM 83 is updated to a value subtracted by "1" (step). S3181). The time-saving game remaining number J indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol determination is executed in the time-saving state (high base state).

Following the process of step S3181, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the time-saving game remaining number J is "0" (step S3182). Here, when it is determined that the time-saving game remaining number J is "0" (step S3182: YES), the time-saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3183). As a result, the support function that facilitates the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22 is not provided.

[Large winning opening opening / closing control process by the main control board 80]
35 to 37 are detailed flowcharts of the large winning opening opening / closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 28. Following the second start opening opening / closing control process in step S5 in FIG. 28, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the jackpot game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 35 (step S601). ). Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game flag is not set to "ON" (step S601: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" (step S601: YES), for example, after setting the opening command related to the jackpot game by the process of step S3175 (see FIG. 34). Based on whether or not the elapsed time has reached a predetermined opening time, it is determined whether or not the opening period in the jackpot game is in progress (step S602).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the opening period in the jackpot game is in progress (step S602: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the opening time has elapsed (step S603). Here, if it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S603: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7. On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S603: YES), the main CPU 81 sets the number of rounds Rmax of the jackpot game, the operation pattern, and the like, and stores the setting information in the main RAM 103 (step S604). .. Specifically, the main CPU 81 sets the number of rounds Rmax based on the opening pattern of the big winning opening in each big hit illustrated in FIGS. 6B and 6C, and sets the number of rounds Rmax, and the first big winning opening 26, the first The operation patterns of the opening / closing member 27, the opening / closing member 29, and the slide member 285 are set so that the two major winning openings 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot.

By executing the process of step S604, various times related to the jackpot game such as the interval time, which is the time from the end of the round game to the start of the next round game, and the ending time after the end of the final round game, are also included. It is also set.

When the process of step S604 is executed, the main CPU 81 updates the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 83 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S605). This number of rounds R is set to "0" before the jackpot game is started, and is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" each time the process of step S605 is performed.

Following the process of step S605, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of rounds R updated in the process of step S605 is "1" (step S606). In the present embodiment, as described above based on FIGS. 6B and 6C, the second big winning opening 28 is used for the first round game for all the big hits, and the second and subsequent rounds are used. The first big winning opening 26 is used for the round game. Therefore, when the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R is "1" (step S606: YES), the main CPU 81 passes through the second large winning opening solenoid 282 (and the V winning opening solenoid 286) to enter the second large winning opening. The second major winning opening opening / closing control for controlling the opening / closing of 28 (and the V winning opening 287) is started (step S607). Then, a command to start a round game for opening and closing the second large winning opening 28 is set in the main RAM 83 to notify that the round game for opening and closing the second large winning opening 28 is started (step S808).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R updated in the process of step S605 is not "1" (step S606: NO), that is, when the number of rounds R is "2" or more, the first major The first large winning opening opening / closing control for controlling the opening / closing of the first large winning opening 26 via the winning opening solenoid 262 is started (step S609).

Following the process of step S609, the main CPU 81 sets in the main RAM 83 a command to start a round game for opening and closing the first large winning opening 26, which notifies that the round game for opening and closing the first large winning opening 26 is started (step S610). ).

The second large winning opening opening / closing round game start command set in the process of step S608 and the first large winning opening opening / closing round game start command set in the process of step S610 are transmitted by the transmission process of step S8 in FIG. 28. , Is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines in the process of step S602 that it is not during the opening period in the jackpot game (step S602: NO), it determines whether or not it is during the ending period in the jackpot game (step S613). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending period is in progress based on whether or not the elapsed time from the end of the final round of the jackpot game has reached a predetermined ending time. Here, if it is determined that the ending period is in progress (step S613: YES), the process proceeds in step S626 (see FIG. 37) described later.

When the main CPU 81 determines that it is not during the ending period of the jackpot game (step S613: NO), for example, during the interval period based on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the end of the previous round game. (Step S614). Here, if it is determined that the interval period is not in progress (step S614: NO), the process proceeds in step S617 (see FIG. 36), which will be described later.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the interval period is in progress (step S614: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the interval time set in the process of step S604 has elapsed since the end of the previous round game. (Step S615). Here, if it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (step S615: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7. On the contrary, when it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (step S615: YES), the processes after step S605 described above are executed.

If the main CPU 81 determines that it is not during the interval period (step S614: NO), that is, if it is in a round game, is the second large winning opening 28 being opened as illustrated in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S617). Specifically, after executing the process of step S607, the first end condition relating to the opening / closing control of the second special winning opening 28 that a predetermined number of game balls win from the opening start of the second special winning opening 28, and Based on whether or not the second end condition regarding the opening / closing control of the second special winning opening 28, that a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses from the opening start of the second special winning opening 28, is not satisfied. , It is determined whether or not the second large winning opening 28 is being opened. If neither the first end condition nor the second end condition is satisfied, it can be determined that the second large winning opening 28 is being opened. Here, if it is determined that the second large winning opening 28 is not open (step S617: NO), the process proceeds to step S621, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the second large winning opening 28 is being opened (step S616: YES), the game ball moves the V winning opening 287 based on the presence or absence of the detection signal from the V winning opening sensor 283. (Step S618). Here, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening 287 (step S618: NO), the process proceeds to step S621, which will be described later.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the game ball has passed the V winning opening 287 (step S618: YES), the main CPU 81 sets the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 to “ON” (step S619). This V winning flag is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning opening 287 (that is, whether or not the game ball has won a V prize), and although it is usually set to "OFF", When the passage of the game ball is detected by the V winning opening sensor 283, it is set to "ON".

Following the process of step S619, the main CPU 81 sets a V winning command in the main RAM 83 for notifying that the game ball has won a V prize (step S620).

When the process of step S620 is executed, the main CPU 81 determines that the second large winning opening 28 is not open (step S617: NO), or determines that the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening 287. If this is the case (step S618: NO), it is determined whether or not the second large winning opening opening / closing control started in the process of step S607 (or the first large winning opening opening / closing control started in the process of step S609) has ended ( Step S621). Here, when it is determined that the large winning opening opening / closing control has not been completed (step S621: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the opening / closing control of the large winning opening has been completed (step S621: YES), does the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 83 match the number of rounds Rmax set in the process of step S604? Whether or not it is determined (step S622). Here, when it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R matches the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: YES), the main CPU 81 starts measuring the ending time, which is the elapsed time from the start of the ending period (step S623), and the ending period is set. An ending command for notifying the start is set in the main RAM 83 (step S624). This ending command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the ending period is in progress in the process of step S613 in FIG. 35 (step S613: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed, as illustrated in FIG. 37. (Step S626). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed based on whether or not the ending time that started the measurement in the process of step S623 has reached the ending time set in the process of step S604. Here, if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S626: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball processing in step S7.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the ending time has elapsed (step S626: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to “ON” (step S627). Here, when it is determined that the V winning flag is set to "ON" (step S627: YES), the probability variation game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S628), and the main RAM 83 is set. The high-probability game remaining number K stored in is set to "100" (step S629), and the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83, which is not shown in FIG. 37, is set to "OFF". ..

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S629, or when it is determined that the V winning flag is not set to "ON" (step S627: NO), the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step). S630). Then, for example, based on the information indicating the type of the jackpot included in the opening command set in the main RAM 83 by the process of step S3175 (see FIG. 34), the jackpot that triggered the execution of the jackpot game this time is shortened. It is determined whether or not the number of times is a jackpot of "100" (in this embodiment, 3R probability variation A, 10R probability variation A, or 3R probability variation B: see FIGS. 6B and 6C) (step S631).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot that triggered the execution of the jackpot game this time is a jackpot with a time saving number of "100" (step S631: YES), the main CPU 81 sets the time saving game remaining number J to "200". (Step S632), when it is determined that the number of time reductions is not a big hit of "100" (step S631: NO), the time reduction game remaining number J is set to "100" (step S633). When the process of step S632 or the process of step S633 is executed in this way, the jackpot game flag is set to "OFF" (step S634).

[Interrupt processing by sub-control board 90]
When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub CPU 91 of the sub control board 90 sets an interrupt cycle, which is a cycle for performing interrupt processing described later. Then, the sub CPU 91 repeats a random number update process for updating the effect random number or the like used for determining the effect content in a predetermined cycle shorter than the interrupt cycle. That is, the sub CPU 91 repeats the interrupt process in the interrupt cycle while repeating the random number update process in a predetermined cycle while the gaming machine 1 is running.

Hereinafter, the interrupt processing executed on the sub-control board 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. Here, FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed on the sub-control board 90. The sub CPU 91 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 38 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the same manner as the interrupt process (see FIG. 28) performed on the main control board 80. The processing performed by the sub-control board 90 described based on the flowcharts of FIGS. 38 and 38 is performed according to an instruction issued by the sub CPU 91 based on the program stored in the sub ROM 92.

First, when the sub CPU 91 receives a command from the main control board 80, the sub CPU 91 executes a command reception process that performs a process according to the command (step S10). This command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 39.

Following the process of step S10, the sub CPU 91 is based on the presence or absence of input of operation information from the first effect button detection sensor 96, the second effect button detection sensor 97, or the key operation detection sensor shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not any of the first effect button 35, the second effect button 36, and the cross key (not shown) shown in FIG. 1 has been operated (step S30). Here, when it is determined that the first effect button 35, the second effect button 36, or the cross key has been operated (step S30: YES), an operation command for notifying that fact is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S31). ). By transmitting this operation command to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the process of step S32 described later, the first effect button 35, the second effect button 36, or the effect corresponding to the operation of the cross key is performed. Processing is performed to realize the effect of.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S31 or determines that there is no operation (step S30: NO), the sub CPU 91 executes the command transmission process (step S32). Specifically, the command set in the sub RAM 93 by the command reception process in step S10 or the process in step S31 is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120). By executing this command transmission process, the image / sound control board 100 is instructed to execute the effect by displaying an image, outputting an effect sound, or the like, and lighting various lamps or executing the effect by a movable accessory or the like is a lamp. It is instructed to the control board 120.

Following the process in step S32, the sub CPU 91 executes the data transfer process (step S33). Specifically, since the data related to the image / sound control is transmitted from the image / sound control board 100, the data is transferred to the lamp control board 120. As a result, the effect by the effect means such as the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the movable decorative member 14 is controlled by the lamp control board 120 so as to be synchronized with the effect performed by the display screen 70 and the speaker 38.

[Command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 39 is a detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. 38. As illustrated in FIG. 39, the sub CPU 91 first determines whether or not a command from the main control board 80 has been received (step S11). Here, if it is determined that the command has not been received (step S11: NO), the process proceeds to step S30 described above.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the command from the main control board 80 has been received (step S11: YES), the command is transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S212 or the process of step S220 of FIG. 29. It is determined whether or not the command is on hold (step S12). Here, if it is determined that the command is not a hold command (step S12: NO), the process proceeds to step S15, which will be described later.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is a hold command (step S12: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes the hold command reception process (step S13). This hold command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 40.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a hold command (step S12: NO), is the command a variable start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S310 of FIG. 31? It is determined whether or not (step S15). Here, if it is determined that the received command is not the fluctuation start command (step S15: NO), the process proceeds to step S17, which will be described later.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is the variation start command (step S15: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes the variation start command reception process (step S16). The variable start command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 43.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the fluctuation start command (step S15: NO), the sub CPU 91 is a fluctuation end command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S314 of FIG. Whether or not it is determined (step S17). When the sub CPU 91 determines that the command is a variation end command (step S17: YES), the sub CPU 91 stops the effect symbol in a manner indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination executed at the start of the symbol variation after ending the variation display of the effect symbol. A variable effect end command instructing the execution of the process to be displayed is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S18).

By transmitting this variation effect end command to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process in step S32, a special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is shown. Is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), and an effect symbol showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is displayed on the display screen. It will be stopped and displayed at 70.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the variable end command (step S17: NO), is the command an opening command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S3175 of FIG. 34? It is determined whether or not (step S19). Here, when it is determined that the received command is the opening command (step S19: YES), the start of the opening effect of notifying the type of the jackpot or urging the player to hit right during the opening period of the jackpot game is imaged. An opening effect start command for instructing the acoustic control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S20).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the opening command (step S19: NO), the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the command is a round game start command (step S21). That is, the second large winning opening opening / closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S608 of FIG. 35, or transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S610 of FIG. 35. It is determined whether or not the first large winning opening opening / closing round game start command has been received.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is a round game start command (step S21: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes a round game start command reception process that performs processing according to the received round game start command (step S22). ..

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the round game start command (step S21: NO), the sub CPU 91 is a V winning command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S620 of FIG. It is determined whether or not there is (step S23). Here, when it is determined that the received command is a V winning command (step S23: YES), the V winning command receiving process that performs processing according to the V winning command is executed (step S24). Specifically, a V prize notification command for instructing the image / acoustic control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) to execute the V prize notification effect illustrated in FIG. 12 is set in the sub RAM 93.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a V winning command (step S23: NO), the sub CPU 91 instructs the image / sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) to execute a predetermined ending effect. The ending command reception process including the process of setting the ending effect start command in the sub RAM 93 is executed (step S25). By transmitting the ending effect start command set in the sub RAM 93 to the image / sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the process of step S25, the mode selection promotion effect described above is executed.

[Hold command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 40 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command reception process in step S13 of FIG. 39. When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is a hold command (step S12: YES), the sub CPU 91 adds "1" to the number of holds for the special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 93, as illustrated in FIG. 40. It is updated to the value (step S131). Specifically, when the hold command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the hold number of the first special symbol determination is updated to the value obtained by adding "1", and the hold command related to the second special symbol determination is executed. When it is received, the pending number of the second special symbol determination is updated to the value obtained by adding "1".

Following the process in step S131, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the received hold command includes the pre-determination information (step S132). Here, when it is determined that the received hold command does not include the pre-determination information (step S132: NO), the hold icon display command is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S133). This hold icon display command is a command for instructing the display of the hold icon that does not include the setting information of the icon change effect (icon change effect pattern information described later), and the image / sound control board 100 and It is transmitted to the lamp control board 120.

When the image / sound control CPU 101 of the image / sound control board 100 receives, for example, a hold icon display command related to the first special symbol determination that does not include the setting information of the icon change effect, the image / sound control CPU 101 controls the drawing process by the VDP 104 to hold the hold icon. A white hold icon is displayed in the display area 71. Since the white hold icon is not set for the icon change effect, the above-mentioned icon change effect is not performed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received hold command includes the pre-determination information (step S132: YES), the sub CPU 91 stores the pre-determination information in the sub RAM 93 (step S134). Next, the sub CPU 91 executes the icon change effect lottery (step S135). Specifically, first, the icon change effect random number is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 93. This icon change effect random number is added by "1" each time the above-mentioned random number update process is performed, and the sub CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the hold command as the icon change effect random number, and the change effect random number is obtained. It is determined whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on whether or not it matches any of the random numbers related to the icon change effect random number stored in the sub ROM 92 in advance.

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 is associated with the pre-judgment result related to the first special symbol determination, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the random number value related to the icon change effect random number. The table is remembered. With reference to this table, the sub CPU 91 refers to the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the determination result of the first special symbol in which the acquired icon change effect random number is specified from the prior determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S134. It is determined whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on whether or not it matches any of the random number values associated with the fluctuation pattern. In this table, with respect to the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination, more random values are associated with "big hit" than with "loss". Further, the longer the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is, the more random values are associated with it. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the higher the jackpot reliability is, the easier it is to execute the icon change effect, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability is, the more difficult it is to execute the icon change effect.

The sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on the lottery result in step S135 (step S136), and when it is determined to execute the icon change effect (step S136: YES), for example, a random number is used. The effect lottery is performed, one of the effect patterns of the plurality of icon change effects is selected, and the information indicating the selected icon change effect pattern is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S137).

Here, the case where the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the lottery for selecting the effect pattern for the icon change effect are separate lottery has been described as an example, but the icon change effect is executed. Whether or not to execute the icon change effect and, if executed, what kind of effect pattern to execute the icon change effect may be determined by one lottery.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S137 or determines that the icon change effect is not executed (step S136: NO), the pre-reading / button effect effect pattern described above is based on FIGS. 23 to 25. Pre-reading for setting the button ・ The button effect pattern setting process is executed (step S138). The look-ahead / button effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 41.

Following the process of step S138, the sub CPU 91 executes the look-ahead / button effect based on whether or not the effect pattern of the look-ahead / button effect is set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S138. Whether or not it is determined (step S139). The pre-reading / button effect described above based on FIGS. 23 to 25 is a button effect executed by using one or a plurality of pre-target fluctuations and a pre-reading target variation, and is described above based on FIG. 26. The pre-reading button effect is a button effect executed by using the first pre-target variation and the second pre-target variation, and these button effects are common in that they are button effects, and the pre-target variation It is also common in that it is executed using. Therefore, it is not preferable that these button effects are executed at the same time. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following processing is executed in order to prevent the look-ahead / button effect and the look-ahead button effect from being executed at the same time.

That is, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the look-ahead / button effect is not executed (step S139: NO), that is, when the look-ahead / button effect effect pattern is not set in the sub RAM 93, the look-ahead button effect (FIG. 26) The look-ahead button effect pattern setting process for setting the effect pattern is executed (step S140). This look-ahead button effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 42.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the look-ahead / button effect is executed (step S139: YES), that is, when the look-ahead / button effect effect pattern is set in the sub RAM 93, the process of step S140. Is not executed, but the process of step S142, which will be described later, is executed.

Here, when the look-ahead / button effect is executed, the look-ahead / button effect and the look-ahead button effect are executed at the same time by not executing the process of step S140 for setting the effect pattern of the look-ahead button effect. For example, the process of step S140 is executed prior to the process of step S138, and the process of step S138 is executed when the effect pattern of the look-ahead button effect is set. It may be possible to prevent the look-ahead button effect and the look-ahead / button effect from being executed at the same time.

Further, for example, both the processing of step S138 for setting the effect pattern of the look-ahead / relevant button effect and the process of step S140 for setting the effect pattern of the look-ahead button effect are executed, and both of these effect patterns of the button effect are executed. If both are set, the look-ahead / button effect and the look-ahead button effect may be prevented from being executed at the same time by discarding one of the effect patterns determined by the lottery.

Returning to the description of the process in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 91 issues a hold icon display command when the process of step S140 is executed or when it is determined that the look-ahead / button effect is executed (step S139: YES). It is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S142). Specifically, when the information indicating the effect pattern of the icon change effect (icon change effect pattern information) is set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S137, the icon change effect is set as the setting information of the icon change effect. A hold icon display command including pattern information is set in the sub RAM 93. If the sub-RAM 93 is set with information indicating a look-ahead / button effect effect pattern (look-ahead / button effect pattern information) by the process of step S138, the pre-reading / button effect setting information is used. The hold icon display command including the look-ahead / button effect pattern information is set in the sub RAM 93. On the other hand, when the information indicating the effect pattern of the look-ahead button effect (look-ahead button effect pattern information) is set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S140, the look-ahead button effect pattern information is used as the setting information of the look-ahead button effect. Set the including hold icon display command in the sub RAM 93.

The hold icon display command set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S142 in this way is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process of step S32. On the other hand, when the received hold icon display command includes the icon change effect pattern information, the image / sound control CPU 101 of the image / sound control board 100 uses the icon change effect pattern information as the setting information of the icon change effect. It is stored in the control RAM 103, and based on this setting information, the VDP 104 and the acoustic DSP 107 are instructed to execute the processing necessary for realizing the icon change effect. If the received hold icon display command includes pre-reading / relevant button effect pattern information, the pre-reading / relevant button effect pattern information is stored in the control RAM 103 as pre-reading / relevant button effect setting information, and this setting is made. Based on the information, the VDP 104 and the acoustic DSP 107 are instructed to execute the processing necessary for realizing the look-ahead and the button effect. If the received hold icon display command includes the look-ahead button effect pattern information, the look-ahead button effect pattern information is stored in the control RAM 103 as the look-ahead button effect setting information, and based on this setting information, the look-ahead button effect pattern information is stored in the control RAM 103. The VDP104 and the acoustic DSP107 are instructed to execute the processing necessary for realizing the button effect.

[Look-ahead by sub-control board 90 / button effect pattern setting process]
FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the look-ahead / button effect pattern setting process in step S138 of FIG. 40. When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S137 or determines that the icon change effect is not executed (step S136: NO), the sub CPU 91 executes a series of look-ahead / button effect pattern setting processes exemplified in FIG. 41. To do.

By the way, when the look-ahead / button effect is executed, the reach establishment failure effect and the loss notification effect may be executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 for the button effect (FIG. 24 (D)). ~ (I)). Further, when the look-ahead / button effect is executed, the reach establishment success effect, the normal reach, and the high-reliability reach may be executed according to the operation of the first effect button 35 for the button effect (Fig.). 25).

From these facts, in order to execute the look-ahead / button effect, as the variation pattern of the first special symbol related to the look-ahead target variation, the variation pattern in which the reachless effect is executed (for example, variation pattern L: FIG. 9 (C). ), Or it can be said that it is necessary to select a variation pattern (eg, variation patterns D, I: see FIGS. 9A and 9B) at which normal reach and high reliability reach are performed. ..

Therefore, first, the sub CPU 91 pre-reads the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol selected at the start of the pre-reading target variation based on the pre-determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S134 in FIG. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a specific variation pattern (in the above example, any of the variation patterns D, I, and L) required to execute the button effect (step S1381). Here, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not specific (step S1381: NO), the process proceeds to step S139 (see FIG. 40) without executing the processes after step S1382.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected at the start of the look-ahead target variation is a specific variation pattern necessary for executing the look-ahead / button effect (step S1381: YES), pre-reading ・ In order to determine whether or not to execute the button effect, the following processing is executed.

That is, the sub CPU 91 acquires the value at the time when the hold command is received from the main control board 80 with respect to the look-ahead / button effect random number that is appropriately updated each time the random number update process is performed on the sub control board 90, and the sub RAM 93 (Step S1382). Then, whether or not the look-ahead / button effect random number acquired in this way matches any of the look-ahead / button effect random numbers stored in the sub ROM 92 and the random number value (winning value) to be compared with the button effect random number. Based on this, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead / button effect (step S1383). Here, if it is determined that the look-ahead / button effect is not executed (step S1383: NO), the process proceeds to step S139.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the look-ahead / button effect is to be executed (step S1383: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the effect with reach is executed in the pre-reading target variation (step S1384). The sub ROM 92 stores a variation effect pattern selection table in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the variation effect pattern of the variation effect including the effect of varying the effect symbol are associated with each other. Therefore, the sub CPU 91 reaches in the look-ahead target variation by reading the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified based on the prior determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 from the variation effect pattern selection table. It is possible to specify whether or not the effect is executed.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the effect with reach is executed in the look-ahead target change (step S1384: YES), that is, the change pattern D or the change pattern I is set as the change pattern of the first special symbol corresponding to the look-ahead target change. When it is specified that the button is selected, the look-ahead of the success effect pattern illustrated in FIGS. 23 (B) to (I), FIGS. 24 (A) to (C), and FIGS. A success effect pattern selection process for selecting a success effect pattern related to the look-ahead / button effect is executed so that the effect is executed (step S1385). On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect with reach is not executed in the look-ahead target change (step S1384: NO), that is, it is specified that the change pattern L is selected as the change pattern of the first special symbol corresponding to the look-ahead target change. In this case, the failure effect related to the look-ahead / button effect is executed so that the look-ahead / button effect of the failure effect pattern exemplified in FIGS. 23 (B) to (I) and FIGS. 24 (A) to (G) is executed. A failure effect pattern selection process for selecting a pattern is executed (step S1386).

Then, the sub CPU 91 sets the information indicating the success effect pattern selected in the process of step S1385 or the information indicating the failure effect pattern selected in the process of step S1386 in the sub RAM 93 as the pre-reading / button effect setting information. (Step S1387). By transmitting the hold icon display command including the pre-reading / button effect setting information set in the sub RAM 93 to the image / sound control board 100 in this way, the pre-reading / button effect is realized as described above. Will be.

[Read-ahead button effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart of the look-ahead button effect pattern setting process in step S140 of FIG. 40. When it is determined that the look-ahead / button effect is not executed (step S139: NO), the sub CPU 91 executes a series of look-ahead button effect pattern setting processes exemplified in FIG. 42.

By the way, as described above based on FIG. 26, the look-ahead button effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is executed by utilizing the two pre-target variations of the first pre-target variation and the second pre-target variation. Therefore, these two pre-target variations need to be executed before the look-ahead target variation is started. In other words, it is an execution condition of the look-ahead button effect that the pre-target variation is executed twice before the start of the look-ahead target variation.

Therefore, the sub CPU 91 first refers to the reserved number of the first special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 93, and is based on whether or not the pre-target variation is executed twice before the start of the pre-reading target variation. , It is determined whether or not the look-ahead button effect can be executed (step S1401). Here, when it is determined that the look-ahead button effect cannot be executed (step S1401: NO), that is, when the two pre-target changes are not executed before the start of the look-ahead target change, the above-mentioned step S142 (FIG. 40). The process proceeds to (see).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the look-ahead button effect can be executed (step S1401: YES), the sub CPU 91 mainly controls the look-ahead button effect random number that is appropriately updated every time the random number update process is performed on the sub control board 90. The value at the time when the hold command is received from the board 80 is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 93 (step S1402). Then, based on whether or not the look-ahead button effect random number acquired in this way matches any of the random number values (winning values) to be compared with the look-ahead button effect random number stored in the sub ROM 92, the look-ahead button effect random number is read ahead. It is determined whether or not to execute the button effect (step S1403). Here, if it is determined that the look-ahead button effect is not executed (step S1403: NO), the process proceeds to step S142.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the pre-reading button effect is to be executed (step S1403: YES), the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the pre-reading target variation is based on the pre-determination information related to the pre-reading target variation. Is determined to be a "big hit" (step S1404). Here, when it is determined that the "big hit" is obtained (step S1404: YES), as described above based on FIG. 26, the jackpot look-ahead button effect pattern selection table is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S1405). ).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the look-ahead target change does not become a "big hit" (step S1404: NO), that is, when it becomes a "loss", the look-ahead target change. Based on the pre-determination information according to the above, it is determined whether or not the reach effect is executed and the loss notification effect is executed in the look-ahead target variation (step S1406). Here, when it is determined that the reach effect is executed and the loss notification effect is executed in the look-ahead target variation (step S1406: YES), the read-ahead button effect pattern selection table for reach loss is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93. (Step S1407) When it is determined that the loss notification effect is executed without executing the reach effect due to the change in the look-ahead target (step S1406: NO), the read-ahead button effect pattern selection table for loss without reach is read from the sub ROM 92. It is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S1408). The process of reading these look-ahead button effect pattern selection tables from the sub ROM 92 and setting them in the sub RAM 93 is as described above based on FIG. 26.

The sub CPU 91 executes the look-ahead button effect pattern selection process when the process of step S1405 is executed, the process of step S1407 is executed, or the process of step S1408 is executed (step S1409). Specifically, the determination result of the first special symbol determination specified by the pre-judgment information corresponding to the look-ahead target variation acquired from the main control board 80 and the variation pattern of the first special symbol also specified by the pre-determination information. By reading the effect pattern corresponding to the acquired look-ahead button effect random number from the look-ahead button effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93, one effect pattern of the look-ahead button effect is selected. Here, a case where the look-ahead button effect pattern is selected using the same look-ahead button effect random number used when deciding whether or not to execute the look-ahead button effect will be described as an example, but the look-ahead button effect will be described. The look-ahead button effect pattern may be selected by using a random number different from the random number.

When the sub CPU 91 selects the effect pattern of the look-ahead button effect by the process of step S1409, the sub CPU 91 sets the look-ahead button effect pattern information indicating the effect pattern of the look-ahead button effect in the sub RAM 93 as the setting information of the look-ahead button effect (step S1410). ). By transmitting the hold icon display command including the setting information of the look-ahead button effect set in the sub RAM 93 to the image / sound control board 100 in this way, the look-ahead button effect is realized as described above. ..

[Variation start command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 43 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S16 of FIG. 39. When the sub CPU 91 determines that the command received from the main control board 80 is the fluctuation start command (step S15: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes a series of fluctuation start command reception processes exemplified in FIG. 43.

That is, the sub CPU 91 acquires the value at the time when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 80 with respect to the effect random number that is appropriately updated by the random number update process on the sub control board 90, and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S161). .. Then, the received fluctuation start command is analyzed (step S162).

As described above, the fluctuation start command includes the setting information of the symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process, whether the setting information of this symbol is related to the first special symbol determination, or is related to the second special symbol determination. It includes information on a winning start port indicating whether or not the game is a game, information on setting a variation pattern of a special symbol, information indicating the game state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. Therefore, by analyzing the fluctuation start command, the type and result of the special symbol determination can be specified. That is, it is possible to specify whether it is a big hit or a loss, and if it is a big hit, what kind of big hit it is. Further, by specifying whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for loss based on the fluctuation pattern setting information, it is possible to determine whether it is necessary to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach. .. In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be specified based on the setting information of the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the gaming state.

When the sub CPU 91 analyzes the variation start command, the sub CPU 91 executes a variation effect pattern setting process for setting the variation effect pattern of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol based on the analysis result (step S163). By executing this variable effect pattern setting process, the variation mode of the effect symbol, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo continuous effect, the type of the effect symbol constituting the reach pattern, the type and content of the reach effect, and the pseudo continuous effect. The content of, the type of effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined. This variation effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 44.

Following the process of step S163, the sub CPU 91 executes the advance notice effect pattern setting process for setting various advance notice effects to be executed when the effect symbols are variablely displayed in the variable effect pattern set in the process of step S163. (Step S164). The notice effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 45.

Next, the sub CPU 91 subsubscribes the variation effect start command instructing the start of the variation effect in the variation effect pattern set in the process of step S163 and the execution of the advance notice effect in the advance notice effect pattern set in the process of step S164. It is set in the RAM 93 (step S170).

This variation effect start command includes information indicating the variation effect pattern set by the process of step S163 and information indicating the notice effect pattern set by the process of step S164, and includes the command transmission process of step S32. Is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120. As a result, the variation effect and the advance notice effect in which the effect pattern is determined on the sub control board 90 are realized by the image / sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

Following the process of step S170, the sub CPU 91 updates the hold number stored in the sub RAM 93 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S171). Specifically, when the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80 notifies the start of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the number of pending first special symbol determinations. Update to. On the other hand, when the received fluctuation start command notifies the start of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the pending number of the second special symbol determination is updated to a value subtracted by "1".

[Variation effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the variation effect pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. 43. Following the process of step S162, the sub CPU 91 sets a final effect symbol to be finally confirmed (mainly stopped) on the display screen 70 along with the stop display of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol). The symbol setting process is executed (step S1631).

Next, whether or not the sub CPU 91 needs to perform the effect with reach in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol this time based on the setting information of the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the received variation start command. Is determined (step S1632). Here, when it is determined that it is not necessary to perform the effect with reach (step S1632: NO), the variable effect pattern of the effect without reach is set (step S1633). For example, from the non-reach variable effect pattern selection table in which a plurality of types of non-reach effect variable effect patterns are associated with each special symbol variation pattern, any one corresponding to the effect random number acquired in the process of step S161. The variation effect pattern is read out, and the information indicating the variation effect pattern is set in the sub RAM 93.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that it is necessary to perform the effect with reach (step S1632: YES), the sub CPU 91 sets a variable effect pattern of the effect with reach (step S1634). For example, from the variation effect pattern selection table for reach, in which a plurality of types of variation effect patterns of reach effect are associated with each combination of the determination result of the special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the special symbol, step S161 is performed. Any one of the variation effect patterns corresponding to the effect random numbers acquired in the process is read out, and the information indicating the variation effect pattern is set in the sub RAM 93.

When the process of step S1633 or the process of step S1634 is performed, what kind of variation pattern the effect symbol is variablely displayed, which reach effect is performed when the reach effect is performed, and when the reach effect is developed. Will decide how to develop the reach production.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a variation effect start command for instructing the start of the variation effect in the variation effect pattern set in the process of step S1633 (or the process of step S1634) is issued from the sub-control board 90 to the image / sound control board. By transmitting to 100 (and the lamp control board 120), a variable effect including a variable display of the effect symbol is realized.

[Preliminary effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 45 is a detailed flowchart of the advance notice effect pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. 43. The sub CPU 91 executes a series of advance notice effect pattern setting processes exemplified in FIG. 45, following the variation effect pattern setting process in step S163. That is, first, the reach establishment big chance notice effect pattern setting process for setting the reach establishment big chance notice effect pattern setting process is executed (step S165). This reach establishment big chance notice is a notice production composed of the above-mentioned reach establishment fanning effect and reach establishment success effect (or reach establishment failure effect) based on FIGS. 13 to 15. The process of setting the reach establishment large chance notice effect pattern will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 46.

Next, the sub CPU 91 sets the SP reach / SPSP reach notice effect pattern composed of the above-mentioned SP reach notice and SPSP reach notice based on FIGS. 16 to 19 SP reach / SPSP reach notice effect pattern. The setting process is executed (step S166). Then, a production pattern of another notice effect different from the reach establishment big chance notice and the SP reach / SPSP reach notice is selected (step S167). Since the process of step S167 can be performed in the same manner as in the conventional case, detailed description here will be omitted.

[Reach establishment large chance notice effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 46 is a detailed flowchart of the reach establishment large chance notice effect pattern setting process in step S165 of FIG. 45. Following the process of step S163, the sub CPU 91 executes a series of reach establishment large chance notice effect pattern setting processes exemplified in FIG. 46.

By the way, the reach establishment big chance notice (see FIGS. 13C to 13F), which is composed of the reach establishment incitement production and the reach establishment success production, will directly develop into SPSP reach immediately after the reach establishment. It is an effect that can be executed when the variation pattern of the symbol (for example, variation pattern C or variation pattern H: see FIGS. 9A and 9B) is selected at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol. .. On the other hand, in the reach establishment big chance notice (see FIGS. 14A to 14G), which is composed of the reach establishment fanning effect and the reach establishment failure effect, the first special symbol variation in which the no reach effect is executed. This is an effect that can be executed when a pattern (for example, variation pattern L: see FIG. 9C) is selected at the start of variation display of the first special symbol.

In this way, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol that can execute the notice of the great chance of establishing reach is limited. Therefore, the sub CPU 91 executes the following processing in order to determine whether or not the reach establishment large chance notice can be executed in accordance with the variation display of the first special symbol this time. That is, the sub CPU 91 is based on the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol specified based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, and the fluctuation pattern is a specific fluctuation capable of executing the reach establishment large chance notice. It is determined whether or not it is a pattern (step S1651). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the specified first special symbol is the variation pattern C, the variation pattern H, or the variation pattern L. Here, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not specific (step S1651: NO), the process proceeds to step S166, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the variation pattern of the first special symbol related to the variation display of the first special symbol this time is a specific variation pattern (step S1651: YES), that is, the variation pattern C, the variation. In the case of the pattern H or the fluctuation pattern L, the change start command of this time is received from the main control board 80 with respect to the reach establishment large chance notice effect random number which is appropriately updated every time the random number update process is performed on the sub control board 90. The value at the time point is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 93 (step S1652). Then, whether or not the reach establishment large chance notice effect random number acquired in this way matches any of the random numbers (winning values) to be compared with the reach establishment large chance notice effect random number stored in the sub ROM 92. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not to execute the reach establishment big chance notice (step S1653). Here, if it is determined not to execute the reach establishment large chance notice (step S1653: NO), the process proceeds to step S166.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the reach establishment large chance notice (step S1653: YES), the reach establishment fan illustrated in FIGS. 13 (C) to 13 (E) and FIGS. 14 (A) to 14 (C). The reach establishment fanning effect pattern selection process for selecting the effect pattern of the effect is executed (step S1654). Next, based on the analysis result of the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, it is determined whether or not the reachless effect is executed during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol this time (step S1655). Here, when it is determined that the non-reach effect is not executed (step S1655: NO), that is, when the reach effect is executed, the effect pattern for executing the reach establishment success effect exemplified in FIG. 13 (F). Is executed (step S1657). On the contrary, when it is determined that the non-reach effect is executed (step S1655: YES), the reach is established by selecting the effect pattern for executing the reach establishment failure effect exemplified in FIGS. 14 (D) to 14 (G). The failure effect pattern selection process is executed (step S1656).

When the process of step S1656 is executed or the process of step S1657 is executed, the sub CPU 91 sets the setting information of the reach establishment large chance notice in the sub RAM 93 (step S1658). Specifically, when the process of step S1656 is executed after the process of step S1654 is executed, the information indicating the effect pattern of the reach establishment fanning effect selected in the process of step S1654 and the reach selected in the process of step S1656 are executed. The information indicating the effect pattern of the establishment failure effect is set in the sub RAM 93 as the setting information of the reach establishment big chance notice. Further, when the process of step S1657 is executed after the process of step S1654 is executed, the information indicating the effect pattern of the reach establishment fanning effect selected in the process of step S1654 and the reach establishment success effect selected in the process of step S1657 are executed. The information indicating the effect pattern of the above is set in the sub RAM 93 as the setting information of the reach establishment big chance notice.

The setting information of the reach establishment large chance notice set in the sub RAM 93 in this way is included in the variation effect start command, and is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100 by the command transmission process in step S32, whereby the sub The notice of a large chance of establishing a reach with the effect pattern set on the control board 90 will be executed.

[SP reach / SPSP reach notice effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 47 is a detailed flowchart of the SP reach / SPSP reach notice effect pattern setting process in step S166 of FIG. 45. Following the process in step S165, the sub CPU 91 executes a series of SP reach / SPSP reach notice effect pattern setting processes exemplified in FIG. 47.

By the way, as described above based on FIGS. 16 to 19, when the SP reach / SPSP reach notice that develops from SP reach to SPSP reach is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 18). , There is a case where the SP reach / SPSP reach notice that does not develop from the SP reach to the SPSP reach is executed (see FIG. 16). That is, the SP reach / SPSP reach notice is a fluctuation pattern in which the winning notification effect is executed in the SP reach without developing into the SPSP reach (for example, the fluctuation pattern B or the fluctuation pattern) as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. G: A variation pattern (for example, variation pattern E) in which the winning notification effect is executed in the SPSP reach by developing from the SP reach to the SPSP reach when (see FIGS. 9A and 9B) is selected. And the variation pattern J: (see FIGS. 9A and 9B) are selected, the effect is executable, and when another variation pattern is selected, the effect is not executed.

As described above, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol capable of executing the SP reach / SPSP reach notice is limited. Therefore, the sub CPU 91 executes the following processing in order to determine whether or not the SP reach / SPSP reach notice can be executed in accordance with the variation display of the first special symbol this time. That is, the sub CPU 91 is a specific one capable of executing the SP reach / SPSP reach notice based on the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol specified based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80. It is determined whether or not the pattern is a fluctuation pattern (step S1661). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the specified first special symbol is the variation pattern B, the variation pattern G, the variation pattern E, or the variation pattern J. Here, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not specific (step S1661: NO), the process proceeds to step S167.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the variation pattern of the first special symbol related to the variation display of the first special symbol this time is a specific variation pattern (step S1661: YES), that is, the variation pattern B, the variation. In the case of the pattern G, the fluctuation pattern E, or the fluctuation pattern J, the SP reach / SPSP reach notice effect random numbers that are appropriately updated each time the random number update process is performed on the sub control board 90 are changed from the main control board 80 this time. The value at the time when the start command is received is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 93 (step S1662). Then, the SP reach / SPSP reach notice effect random number acquired in this way matches any one of the random numbers (winning values) to be compared with the SP reach / SPSP reach notice effect random number stored in the sub ROM 92. Based on whether or not, it is determined whether or not to execute the SP reach / SPSP reach notice (step S1663). Here, if it is determined that the SP reach / SPSP reach notice is not executed (step S1663: NO), the process proceeds to step S167.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the SP reach / SPSP reach notice is executed (step S1663: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not it develops into the SPSP reach (step S1664). In the sub ROM 92, a variation effect pattern selection table in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the effect pattern of the variation effect (variation effect pattern) are associated with each other is stored. Therefore, the sub CPU 91 reads the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80 from the variation effect pattern selection table, and reads out the variation effect pattern. Based on the above, it can be determined whether or not the SPSP reach is developed. In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the variation pattern E and the variation pattern J are associated with the variation effect patterns E and J that develop from the SP reach to the SPSP reach. , Fluctuation pattern B and variation pattern G are associated with variation effect patterns B and G that do not develop into SPSP reach and execute a winning notification effect in SP reach. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern E or the fluctuation pattern J is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, it is determined that the SPSP reach is developed, and when the fluctuation pattern B or the fluctuation pattern G is selected, the SPSP It will be judged that it will not develop into reach.

When it is determined that the sub CPU 91 does not develop into SPSP reach (step S1664: NO), the sub CPU 91 executes the failure notice effect pattern selection process during SP reach (step S1665). Specifically, as an effect pattern of SP reach / SPSP reach notice, after performing an explanatory effect (see FIG. 16 (B)), a continuous hit promotion effect is started (see FIG. 16 (C)), and this continuous hit promotion effect is used. An effect pattern showing that the display mode of the first suggestion image does not change from the initial display mode even if the player repeatedly hits the first effect button 35 during the valid period (see FIGS. 16D and 16E). select.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub CPU 91 develops into SPSP reach (step S1664: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes the SP reach during success notice effect pattern selection process (step S1666), and executes the SPSP reach during notice effect pattern selection process (step S1666). Step S1667). Specifically, after performing the explanatory effect (see FIG. 16 (B)), the continuous hit promotion effect is started (see FIG. 18 (A)), and the player performs the first effect during the valid period related to the continuous hit promotion effect. A success notice effect pattern during SP reach is selected, which represents a state in which the display mode of the first suggested image changes from the initial display mode (see FIGS. 18 (B) to 18 (D)) in response to repeated pressing of the button 35. Then, as described above based on FIGS. 18 (H) to 18 (I) and FIGS. 19 (A) to 19 (C), the display mode of the second suggestion image is changed by using the first suggestion image whose display mode is changed. Then, the SPSP reach notice effect pattern indicating how the final attack effect is executed is selected.

When the process of step S1665 is executed or the process of step S1667 is executed, the sub CPU 91 sets the SP reach / SPSP reach notice setting information in the sub RAM 93 (step S1668). Specifically, when the process of step S1665 is executed, the information indicating the effect pattern of the failure notice during SP reach selected in the process of step S1665 is set in the sub RAM 93 as the setting information of the SP reach / SPSP reach notice. When the process of step S1666 and the process of step S1667 are executed, the information indicating the effect pattern of the SP reach success notice selected in the process of step S1666 and the effect of the SPSP reach notice selected in the process of step S1667 are executed. The information indicating the pattern is set in the sub RAM 93 as the setting information of the SP reach / SPSP reach notice.

The setting information of the SP reach / SPSP reach notice set in the sub RAM 93 in this way is included in the variation effect start command, and is transmitted to the image / sound control board 100 by the command transmission process in step S32. The SP reach / SPSP reach notice will be executed in the effect pattern set on the sub-control board 90.

[Interrupt processing by the image / sound control board 100]
Next, the interrupt processing executed on the image / sound control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 48. Here, FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed on the image / sound control board 100. The image / sound control board 100 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 48 at regular time intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. ..

First, the image / sound control CPU 101 executes an image display control process for controlling the image display on the display screen 70 based on the command received from the sub control board 90 (step S71). This image display control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 49.

Following the process of step S71, the image / sound control CPU 101 executes an effect sound output control process for outputting various effect sounds from the speaker 38 so as to synchronize with or asynchronously with the screen display performed on the display screen 70. (Step S72).

Following the process in step S72, the image / sound control CPU 101 executes the data transmission control process (step S73). Specifically, data relating to the image / acoustic control performed on the image / acoustic control board 100 is transmitted to the sub control board 90. On the other hand, the sub control board 90 transfers the data received from the image / sound control board 100 to the lamp control board 120. As a result, the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like are controlled so as to be synchronized with the effect executed by the display screen 70 and the speaker 38.

[Image display control processing by the image / sound control board 100]
FIG. 49 is a detailed flowchart of the image display control process in step S71 of FIG. 48. The image / sound control CPU 101 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the sub control board 90 has been received (step S711). Here, if it is determined that the command has not been received (step S7111: NO), the process proceeds to step S72.

On the other hand, when the image / sound control CPU 101 determines that the command from the sub control board 90 has been received (step S711: YES), the setting information included in the command is set in the control RAM 103 (step S712). Then, based on the setting information set in the control RAM 103, it is determined how the effect image should be displayed on the display screen 70, a display list for controlling the drawing process of the VDP 104 is created, and a predetermined area of the control RAM 103 is created. (Step S713), and the display list is set in the display list storage area of the VRAM 106 (step S714). When the VDP 104 executes the drawing process based on the display list set in the display list storage area, the effect display instructed by the sub-control board 90 is realized.

It goes without saying that the configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized even with other configurations and operation modes. Further, the processing order, set value, random number value, threshold value used for determination, etc. in the above-mentioned flowchart are merely examples, and the present invention may have other orders or values as long as they do not deviate from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say, it can be realized. The drawings and the like illustrated in the above embodiment are merely examples, and may be in other embodiments.

1 Gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine), 7 Image display device, 21 1st starting port, 22 2nd starting port, 23 opening / closing member, 26 1st big winning opening, 28 2nd big winning opening, 41 1st special symbol display Instrument, 42 2nd special symbol display, 70 display screen, 80 main control board, 81 main CPU, 90 sub control board, 91 sub CPU, 100 image acoustic control board, 101 image acoustic control CPU, 211 1st start port sensor , 221 2nd starting port sensor, 261 1st big winning opening sensor, 262 1st big winning opening sensor, 281 2nd big winning opening sensor, 282 2nd big winning opening sensor, 283 V winning opening sensor, 284 outlet sensor , 285 slide member, 286 V winning opening solenoid, 287 V winning opening.

Claims (1)

Judgment means for determining whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player,
When the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed, the special game execution means for executing the special game and the special game execution means for executing the special game.
Equipped with a production control means to control the production,
The effect control means
Based on the result of the determination, the first effect and the second effect that can be performed after the first effect can be executed.
During the execution of the first effect and the execution of the second effect, a predetermined effect song that is not output when these effects are not executed is played.
The effect control means
The production is such that the production song of the first musical tone is played during the execution of the first production, and the production song of the second musical tone different from the first musical tone is played during the execution of the second production. A gaming machine characterized by controlling the playback of songs.

Images